--- embedaddon/quagga/doc/texinfo.tex	2012/02/21 17:26:11	1.1.1.1
+++ embedaddon/quagga/doc/texinfo.tex	2016/11/02 10:09:11	1.1.1.5
@@ -3,11 +3,12 @@
 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
 %
-\def\texinfoversion{2009-08-14.15}
+\def\texinfoversion{2016-02-05.07}
 %
 % Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
 % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
-% 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+% 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016
+% Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 %
 % This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
@@ -24,13 +25,14 @@
 %
 % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
 % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
-% restriction.  (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
+% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7
+% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3").
 %
 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
 % reports; you can get the latest version from:
-%   http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
-%   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
-%     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
+%   http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or
+%   http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or
+%   http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page)
 % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
 %
@@ -65,7 +67,6 @@
 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
   \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
 
-
 \chardef\other=12
 
 % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
@@ -93,14 +94,15 @@
 \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
 \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
 \let\ptexplus=+
+\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
 \let\ptexrbrace=\}
 \let\ptexslash=\/
+\let\ptexsp=\sp
 \let\ptexstar=\*
+\let\ptexsup=\sup
 \let\ptext=\t
 \let\ptextop=\top
-{\catcode`\'=\active
-\global\let\ptexquoteright'}% Math-mode def from plain.tex.
-\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
+{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode
 
 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
 % starts a new line in the output.
@@ -118,10 +120,11 @@
 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
+\ifx\putworderror\undefined     \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi
 \ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
 \ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
-\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
-\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined       \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined   \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
 \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
 \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
 \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
@@ -155,20 +158,11 @@
 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
 
-% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
-\chardef\spacecat = 10
-\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
+% Give the space character the catcode for a space.
+\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =10\relax}
 
-% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
-\chardef\colonChar = `\:
-\chardef\commaChar = `\,
 \chardef\dashChar  = `\-
-\chardef\dotChar   = `\.
-\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
-\chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
-\chardef\questChar = `\?
-\chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
-\chardef\semiChar  = `\;
+\chardef\slashChar = `\/
 \chardef\underChar = `\_
 
 % Ignore a token.
@@ -190,46 +184,6 @@
   wide-spread wrap-around
 }
 
-% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
-\newdimen\bindingoffset
-\newdimen\normaloffset
-\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
-
-% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
-% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
-% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
-%
-\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
-
-% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
-% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
-% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
-% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
-% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
-%
-\def\|{%
-  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
-  \leavevmode
-  %
-  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
-  \vadjust{%
-    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
-    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
-    \vskip-\baselineskip
-    %
-    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
-    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
-    \llap{%
-      %
-      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
-      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
-      %
-      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
-      \hskip 12pt
-    }%
-  }%
-}
-
 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
 % and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
 % since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make
@@ -246,7 +200,7 @@
   \tracingmacros2
   \tracingrestores1
   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
-  \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
+  \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging
     \tracingscantokens1
     \tracingifs1
     \tracinggroups1
@@ -257,6 +211,13 @@
   \errorcontextlines16
 }%
 
+% @errormsg{MSG}.  Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things
+% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message,
+% after all.
+% 
+\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg}
+\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}}
+
 % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
 % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
 %
@@ -267,7 +228,15 @@
 \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
   \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
 
-% For @cropmarks command.
+% Output routine
+%
+
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+%
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt }
+
 % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
 %
 \newif\ifcropmarks
@@ -290,10 +259,18 @@
 %
 % Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
 % (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
-% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page.  The solution is
-% described on page 260 of The TeXbook.  It involves outputting two
-% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
-% one after.  I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
+% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page.
+
+% \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one
+% mark before the section break, and one after.
+%   In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \lastchapterdefs,
+% and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \lastsectiondefs.
+%   Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous
+% section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section
+% from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top.
+%   @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark.
+%
+% See page 260 of The TeXbook.
 \def\domark{%
   \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
   \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
@@ -301,11 +278,15 @@
   \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
   \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
   \mark{%
-                   \the\toks0 \the\toks2
-      \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6
-    \noexpand\else \the\toks8
+                   \the\toks0 \the\toks2  % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top
+      \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6  % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom
+    \noexpand\else \the\toks8             % 2: color marks
   }%
 }
+
+% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks,
+% \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark.
+%
 % \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
 % page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
 % the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
@@ -321,33 +302,67 @@
 % Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
 \def\lastchapterdefs{}
 \def\lastsectiondefs{}
+\def\lastsection{}
 \def\prevchapterdefs{}
 \def\prevsectiondefs{}
 \def\lastcolordefs{}
 
+% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
+\newdimen\bindingoffset
+\newdimen\normaloffset
+\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
+
 % Main output routine.
+%
 \chardef\PAGE = 255
 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
 
 \newbox\headlinebox
 \newbox\footlinebox
 
-% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
-% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
+% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.
+% \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer,
+% cropmarks, and footnote.  This also causes index entries for this page
+% to be written to the auxiliary files.
+%
 \def\onepageout#1{%
   \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
   %
   \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
   \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
   %
+  % Common context changes for both heading and footing.
   % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
   % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
+  \def\commmonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \texinfochars}
+  %
+  % Retrieve the information for the headings from the marks in the page,
+  % and call Plain TeX's \makeheadline and \makefootline, which use the
+  % values in \headline and \footline.
+  %
+  % This is used to check if we are on the first page of a chapter.
+  \ifcase1\topmark\fi
+  \let\prevchaptername\thischaptername
+  \ifcase0\firstmark\fi
+  \let\curchaptername\thischaptername
+  %
   \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
-  \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
   \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
-  \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
   %
+  \ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername
+    \let\thischapterheading\thischapter
+  \else
+    % \thischapterheading is the same as \thischapter except it is blank
+    % for the first page of a chapter.  This is to prevent the chapter name 
+    % being shown twice.
+    \def\thischapterheading{}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makeheadline}%
+  \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makefootline}%
+  %
   {%
+    % Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files.
     % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
     % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
     % before the \shipout runs.
@@ -356,10 +371,10 @@
     \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
                % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
                % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
-               % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
+               % \entry{{\indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
                % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
                % it needs to be
-               % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
+               % {\code {{\backslashcurfont }acronym}
     \shipout\vbox{%
       % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
       \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
@@ -417,6 +432,7 @@
 
 \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
 
+% Main part of page, including any footnotes
 \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
 {\catcode`\@ =11
 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
@@ -439,9 +455,13 @@
 \def\nsbot{\vbox
   {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
 
+
+% Argument parsing
+
 % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
+% For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}.
 %
 \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
 \def\parseargusing#1#2{%
@@ -460,9 +480,11 @@
   }%
 }
 
-% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
+% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.  Also remove a @texinfoc
+% comment (see \scanmacro for details).  Pass the result on to \argcheckspaces.
 \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
-\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argremovetexinfoc #1\texinfoc\ArgTerm}
+\def\argremovetexinfoc#1\texinfoc#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
 
 % Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
 %
@@ -497,14 +519,13 @@
 %
 \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
 
+
+% \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line
+%
 % \parseargdef\foo{...}
 %	is roughly equivalent to
 % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
 % \def\Xfoo#1{...}
-%
-% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
-% favourite TeX trick.  --kasal, 16nov03
-
 \def\parseargdef#1{%
   \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
 }
@@ -577,7 +598,7 @@
 }
 \def\inenvironment#1{%
   \ifx#1\empty
-    out of any environment%
+    outside of any environment%
   \else
     in environment \expandafter\string#1%
   \fi
@@ -589,7 +610,7 @@
 \parseargdef\end{%
   \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
   \else
-    % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
+    % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal.
     \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
     \csname E#1\endcsname
     \endgroup
@@ -599,85 +620,6 @@
 \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
 
 
-%% Simple single-character @ commands
-
-% @@ prints an @
-% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
-\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
-
-% This is turned off because it was never documented
-% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
-%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
-%% but suppressing ligatures.
-%\def\`{{`}}
-%\def\'{{'}}
-
-% Used to generate quoted braces.
-\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
-\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
-\let\{=\mylbrace
-\let\}=\myrbrace
-\begingroup
-  % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
-  % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
-  \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
-  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
-  \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
-  !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
-  !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
-  !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
-  !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
-!endgroup
-
-% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
-\let\comma = ,
-
-% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
-% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
-\let\, = \c
-\let\dotaccent = \.
-\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
-\let\tieaccent = \t
-\let\ubaraccent = \b
-\let\udotaccent = \d
-
-% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
-% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
-\def\questiondown{?`}
-\def\exclamdown{!`}
-\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
-\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
-
-% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
-\def\imacro{i}
-\def\jmacro{j}
-\def\dotless#1{%
-  \def\temp{#1}%
-  \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
-  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
-  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
-  \fi\fi
-}
-
-% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
-% period following counts as ending a sentence.  (Idea found in latex.)
-%
-\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
-
-% @LaTeX{} logo.  Not quite the same results as the definition in
-% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
-% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
-% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
-% \scriptscriptstyle).
-%
-\def\LaTeX{%
-  L\kern-.36em
-  {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
-   \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
-  \kern-.15em
-  \TeX
-}
-
 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
@@ -694,7 +636,7 @@
 \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
 
 % @* forces a line break.
-\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
+\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
 
 % @/ allows a line break.
 \let\/=\allowbreak
@@ -719,7 +661,7 @@
   \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
   \else
     \errhelp = \EMsimple
-    \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}%
+    \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}%
   \fi\fi
 }
 
@@ -773,6 +715,12 @@
     \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
     \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
   \egroup           % End the \vtop.
+  \addgroupbox
+  \prevdepth = \dimen1
+  \checkinserts
+}
+
+\def\addgroupbox{
   % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
   \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
   % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
@@ -785,9 +733,8 @@
     \fi
   \fi
   \box\groupbox
-  \prevdepth = \dimen1
-  \checkinserts
 }
+
 %
 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
@@ -801,15 +748,6 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 \newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
 
-% Old definition--didn't work.
-%\parseargdef\need{\par %
-%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
-%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
-%{\baselineskip=0pt%
-%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
-%\prevdepth=-1000pt
-%}}
-
 \parseargdef\need{%
   % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
   % paragraph.
@@ -873,7 +811,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
 % paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
-% class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.
+% class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.  Not documented, written for gawk manual.
 %
 \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
 \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
@@ -920,6 +858,36 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \temp
 }
 
+% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
+% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
+% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
+% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
+% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).  This command
+% is not documented, not supported, and doesn't work.
+%
+\def\|{%
+  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
+  \leavevmode
+  %
+  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
+  \vadjust{%
+    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
+    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
+    \vskip-\baselineskip
+    %
+    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
+    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
+    \llap{%
+      %
+      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
+      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
+      %
+      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
+      \hskip 12pt
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+
 % @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
 %
 \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
@@ -930,6 +898,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
     \makevalueexpandable  % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
     \turnoffactive        % and allow special characters in the expansion
     \indexnofonts         % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
+    \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}%
     \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
     %
     % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
@@ -965,7 +934,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
 \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
   the stack of filenames is empty.}}
-
+%
 \def\thisfile{}
 
 % @center line
@@ -973,38 +942,56 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 %
 \parseargdef\center{%
   \ifhmode
-    \let\next\centerH
+    \let\centersub\centerH
   \else
-    \let\next\centerV
+    \let\centersub\centerV
   \fi
-  \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
+  \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
+  \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case
 }
-\def\centerH#1{%
-  {%
-    \hfil\break
-    \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
-    \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
-    \line{#1}%
-    \break
-  }%
+\def\centerH#1{{%
+  \hfil\break
+  \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
+  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+  \line{#1}%
+  \break
+}}
+%
+\newcount\centerpenalty
+\def\centerV#1{%
+  % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if
+  % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe
+  % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still
+  % prevent a page break here.
+  \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty
+  \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi
+  \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi
+  \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}%
 }
-\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
 
 % @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
-
+%
 \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
 
 % @comment ...line which is ignored...
 % @c is the same as @comment
 % @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
+%
+\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active%
+\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other\commentxxx}%
 
-\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
+{\catcode`\^^M=\active%
+\gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup%
+\futurelet\nexttoken\commentxxxx}%
+\gdef\commentxxxx{\ifx\nexttoken\aftermacro\expandafter\comment\fi}%
+}
+
+\def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active%
 \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
-\commentxxx}
-{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
+\cxxx}
+{\catcode`\^^M=\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
+% See comment in \scanmacro about why the definitions of @c and @comment differ
 
-\let\c=\comment
-
 % @paragraphindent NCHARS
 % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
 % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
@@ -1074,173 +1061,24 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % paragraph.
 %
 \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
-  \gdef\indent{%
-    \restorefirstparagraphindent
-    \indent
-  }%
-  \gdef\noindent{%
-    \restorefirstparagraphindent
-    \noindent
-  }%
-  \global\everypar = {%
-    \kern -\parindent
-    \restorefirstparagraphindent
-  }%
+  \gdef\indent  {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}%
+  \gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}%
+  \global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}%
 }
-
+%
 \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
-  \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
-  \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
-  \global \everypar = {}%
+  \global\let\indent = \ptexindent
+  \global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent
+  \global\everypar = {}%
 }
 
 
-% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
-%
-\def\asis#1{#1}
-
-% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
-%
-% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
-% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
-% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
-% which is what @var uses.
-{
-  \catcode`\_ = \active
-  \gdef\mathunderscore{%
-    \catcode`\_=\active
-    \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
-  }
-}
-% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
-% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
-% this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not
-% otherwise define @\.
-%
-% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
-\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
-%
-\def\math{%
-  \tex
-  \mathunderscore
-  \let\\ = \mathbackslash
-  \mathactive
-  % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
-  \let\"=\ddot
-  \let\'=\acute
-  \let\==\bar
-  \let\^=\hat
-  \let\`=\grave
-  \let\u=\breve
-  \let\v=\check
-  \let\~=\tilde
-  \let\dotaccent=\dot
-  $\finishmath
-}
-\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup}  % Close the group opened by \tex.
-
-% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
-% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
-% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
-%
-{
-  \catcode`^ = \active
-  \catcode`< = \active
-  \catcode`> = \active
-  \catcode`+ = \active
-  \catcode`' = \active
-  \gdef\mathactive{%
-    \let^ = \ptexhat
-    \let< = \ptexless
-    \let> = \ptexgtr
-    \let+ = \ptexplus
-    \let' = \ptexquoteright
-  }
-}
-
-% Some math mode symbols.
-\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
-\def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
-\def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
-\def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}
-
-% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
-% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
-% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
-% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em.  So do
-% whichever is larger.
-%
-\def\dots{%
-  \leavevmode
-  \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
-  \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
-    \dimen0 = \wd0
-  \else
-    \dimen0 = 1.5em
-  \fi
-  \hbox to \dimen0{%
-    \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
-    .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
-    .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
-    .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
-  }%
-}
-
-% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
-%
-\def\enddots{%
-  \dots
-  \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
-}
-
-% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
-% Texinfo's parsing.
-%
-\let\comma = ,
-
 % @refill is a no-op.
 \let\refill=\relax
 
-% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
-% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
-% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
-%
-\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
-\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
+% @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored
+\let\setfilename=\comment
 
-% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
-% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
-% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
-\def\setfilename{%
-   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
-   \iflinks
-     \tryauxfile
-     % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
-     \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
-   \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
-   \openindices
-   \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
-   %
-   % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
-   % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
-   \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
-   \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
-   \closein 1
-   %
-   \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
-}
-
-% Called from \setfilename.
-%
-\def\openindices{%
-  \newindex{cp}%
-  \newcodeindex{fn}%
-  \newcodeindex{vr}%
-  \newcodeindex{tp}%
-  \newcodeindex{ky}%
-  \newcodeindex{pg}%
-}
-
 % @bye.
 \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
 
@@ -1257,14 +1095,14 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \newtoks\toksC
 \newtoks\toksD
 \newbox\boxA
+\newbox\boxB
 \newcount\countA
 \newif\ifpdf
 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
 
 % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
-% can be set).  So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
-% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
-\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
+% can be set).  So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined.
+\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined
 \else
   \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
   \else
@@ -1279,52 +1117,26 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % for display in the outlines, and in other places.  Thus, we have to
 % double any backslashes.  Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
 % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e.  Not good.
-% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html
-% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX
-% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
-% that's what we do).
+% 
+% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and
+% related messages.  The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user
+% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
+% that's what we do.  pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to
+% do this reliably, so we use it.
 
-% double active backslashes.
-%
-{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
- @gdef@activebackslashdouble{%
-   @catcode`@\=@active
-   @let\=@doublebackslash}
+% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements,
+% which we \xdef.
+\def\txiescapepdf#1{%
+  \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined
+    % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log?
+    % Many times it won't matter.
+  \else
+    % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses,
+    % backslashes, and other special chars.
+    \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}%
+  \fi
 }
 
-% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are
-% not active characters.  hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as
-% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor
-% changes for Texinfo.  It is included here under the GPL by permission
-% from the author, Heiko Oberdiek.
-%
-% #1 is the tokens to replace.
-% #2 is the replacement.
-% #3 is the control sequence with the string.
-%
-\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{%
-  \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{%
-    ##1%
-    \ifx\\##2\\%
-    \else
-      #2%
-      \HyReturnAfterFi{%
-        \HyPsdReplace##2\END
-      }%
-    \fi
-  }%
-  \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}%
-}
-\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
-
-% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements.
-\def\backslashparens#1{%
-  \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply
-             % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest.
-  \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}%
-  \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}%
-}
-
 \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
 with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found.  (.eps cannot
 be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
@@ -1332,15 +1144,17 @@ output) for that.)}
 
 \ifpdf
   %
-  % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex,
+  % Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex,
   % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
   % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
-  % of actual black.
+  % of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as
+  % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.  We use
+  % black by default, though.
   \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
   \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
   %
-  % k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
-  % K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
+  % rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
+  % RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
   \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg  #1 RG}}
   %
   % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
@@ -1381,32 +1195,34 @@ output) for that.)}
   %
   % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
   \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
-    \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
-    \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+    \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+    \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
     %
-    % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among
-    % others).  Let's try in that order.
+    % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
+    % others).  Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
+    % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
+    % bitmap.
     \let\pdfimgext=\empty
     \begingroup
-      \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
-        \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
-          \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
-            \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
-              \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
-                \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
+      \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
+        \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
+          \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
+            \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
+              \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
+                \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
                   \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
                   \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
-                \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
+                \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
                 \fi
-              \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
+              \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
               \fi
-            \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
+            \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
             \fi
-          \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
+          \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
           \fi
-        \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
+        \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
         \fi
-      \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
+      \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
       \fi
       \closein 1
     \endgroup
@@ -1418,8 +1234,8 @@ output) for that.)}
     \else
       \immediate\pdfximage
     \fi
-      \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi
-      \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi
+      \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi
+      \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi
       \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
          #1.\pdfimgext
        \else
@@ -1434,20 +1250,18 @@ output) for that.)}
     % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
     \indexnofonts
     \turnoffactive
-    \activebackslashdouble
     \makevalueexpandable
     \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
-    \backslashparens\pdfdestname
+    \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
     \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
   }}
   %
   % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
   \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
   %
-  % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
-  % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
-  \def\urlcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
-  \def\linkcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
+  % by default, use black for everything.
+  \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack}
+  \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack}
   \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
   %
   % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
@@ -1469,29 +1283,24 @@ output) for that.)}
     % page number.  We could generate a destination for the section
     % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
     % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
-    \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
+    \edef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
     \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
       \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
     \else
-      % Doubled backslashes in the name.
-      {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
-       \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}%
+      \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinedest
     \fi
     %
-    % Also double the backslashes in the display string.
-    {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
-     \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}%
+    % Also escape PDF chars in the display string.
+    \edef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
+    \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext
     %
     \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
   }
   %
   \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
     \begingroup
-      % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
-      \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
-      \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
-      %
       % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
+      \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
       \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
 	\def\thischapnum{##2}%
 	\def\thissecnum{0}%
@@ -1545,25 +1354,41 @@ output) for that.)}
       % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character.  Info from
       % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
       %
-      % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
-      % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding.  Right
-      % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
+      % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
+      % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding.  Too
+      % much work for too little return.  Just use the ASCII equivalents
+      % we use for the index sort strings.
+      % 
       \indexnofonts
       \setupdatafile
+      % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
+      % Texinfo index files.  So set that up.
+      \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
+      \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
       \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
       \input \tocreadfilename
     \endgroup
   }
+  {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
+   \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
+   \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
+   \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
+  ]
   %
   \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
     \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
     \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
-      \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
-        \advance\filenamelength by 1
-      \fi
+      \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
+      \advance\filenamelength by 1
     \fi
     \nextsp}
-  \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
+  \def\getfilename#1{%
+    \filenamelength=0
+    % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
+    % snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
+    \edef\temp{#1}%
+    \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
+  }
   \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
     \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
   \else
@@ -1624,6 +1449,56 @@ output) for that.)}
   \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
 \fi  % \ifx\pdfoutput
 
+%
+% @image support for XeTeX
+%
+\newif\ifxeteximgpdf
+\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
+\else
+  %
+  % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
+  \def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{%
+    \def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+    \def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+    %
+    % XeTeX (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
+    % others).  Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
+    % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
+    % bitmap.
+    \let\xeteximgext=\empty
+    \xeteximgpdffalse
+    \begingroup
+      \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
+        \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
+          \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
+            \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
+              \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
+                \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
+                  \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for XeTeX}%
+                \else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG}%
+                \fi
+              \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg}%
+              \fi
+            \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg}%
+            \fi
+          \else \gdef\xeteximgext{png}%
+          \fi
+        \else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF} \global\xeteximgpdftrue%
+        \fi
+      \else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf} \global\xeteximgpdftrue%
+      \fi
+      \closein 1
+    \endgroup
+    %
+    \ifxeteximgpdf
+      \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
+    \else
+      \XeTeXpicfile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
+    \fi
+    \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \xeteximagewidth \fi
+    \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \xeteximageheight \fi \relax
+  }
+\fi
 
 \message{fonts,}
 
@@ -1660,9 +1535,6 @@ output) for that.)}
 \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
 
 
-% Default leading.
-\newdimen\textleading  \textleading = 13.2pt
-
 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
 % correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
 % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
@@ -1674,6 +1546,7 @@ output) for that.)}
 % can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
 \def\baselinefactor{1}
 %
+\newdimen\textleading
 \def\setleading#1{%
   \dimen0 = #1\relax
   \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
@@ -1695,7 +1568,7 @@ output) for that.)}
 % if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
 % (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
 % older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
-\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\undefined \else
+\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else
   \begingroup
     \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
     \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
@@ -1946,28 +1819,34 @@ end
 \fi\fi
 
 
-% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
-% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
+% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2.
 % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
-% encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass
-% empty to omit).
+% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit).
+% Example:
+% #1 = \textrm
+% #2 = \rmshape
+% #3 = 10
+% #4 = \mainmagstep
+% #5 = OT1
+%
 \def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
   \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
   \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
 }
 % This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
 \let\cmap\gobble
-% emacs-page end of cmaps
+%
+% (end of cmaps)
 
 % Use cm as the default font prefix.
 % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
 % before you read in texinfo.tex.
-\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
+\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined
 \def\fontprefix{cm}
 \fi
 % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
 \def\rmshape{r}
-\def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
+\def\rmbshape{bx}               % where the normal face is bold
 \def\bfshape{b}
 \def\bxshape{bx}
 \def\ttshape{tt}
@@ -1982,8 +1861,7 @@ end
 \def\scshape{csc}
 \def\scbshape{csc}
 
-% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt.  This is the default in
-% Texinfo.
+% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt.  (The default in Texinfo.)
 %
 \def\definetextfontsizexi{%
 % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
@@ -2004,8 +1882,10 @@ end
 % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
-\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf
+\let\tenttsl=\defttsl \let\tensl=\defsl \bf}
 
 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
@@ -2066,6 +1946,7 @@ end
 % Section fonts (14.4pt).
 \def\secnominalsize{14pt}
 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
@@ -2105,10 +1986,10 @@ end
 \font\reducedsy=cmsy10
 \def\reducedecsize{1000}
 
-% reset the current fonts
-\textfonts
+\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM
+\textfonts            % reset the current fonts
 \rm
-} % end of 11pt text font size definitions
+} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi
 
 
 % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
@@ -2135,8 +2016,10 @@ end
 % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
-\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf
+\let\tensl=\defsl \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
 
 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
@@ -2236,25 +2119,24 @@ end
 \font\reducedsy=cmsy9
 \def\reducedecsize{0900}
 
-% reduce space between paragraphs
-\divide\parskip by 2
-
-% reset the current fonts
-\textfonts
+\divide\parskip by 2  % reduce space between paragraphs
+\textleading = 12pt   % line spacing for 10pt CM
+\textfonts            % reset the current fonts
 \rm
-} % end of 10pt text font size definitions
+} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex
 
 
 % We provide the user-level command
 %   @fonttextsize 10
 % (or 11) to redefine the text font size.  pt is assumed.
 %
-\def\xword{10}
 \def\xiword{11}
+\def\xword{10}
+\def\xwordpt{10pt}
 %
 \parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
   \def\textsizearg{#1}%
-  \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
+  %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
   %
   % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
   % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
@@ -2269,12 +2151,9 @@ end
  \endgroup
 }
 
-
 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
-% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
-% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
-% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
-% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
+% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  We don't
+% bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need.
 %
 \def\resetmathfonts{%
   \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
@@ -2288,8 +2167,8 @@ end
 % \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
 %
 % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
-% and \lllsize (three sizes lower).  These relative commands are used in
-% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
+% and \lllsize (three sizes lower).  These relative commands are used
+% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
 %
 % This all needs generalizing, badly.
 %
@@ -2308,7 +2187,7 @@ end
   \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
   \def\curfontsize{title}%
   \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
-  \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{27pt}}
 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
 \def\chapfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
@@ -2325,7 +2204,7 @@ end
   \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
   \def\curfontsize{sec}%
   \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
-  \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{17pt}}
 \def\subsecfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
   \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
@@ -2436,12 +2315,14 @@ end
 
 % Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
 \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
+    \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
   \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
 }
 
 \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
+    \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
   \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
 }
 
@@ -2454,28 +2335,31 @@ end
 
 \gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
 \gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
-
-\gdef\markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft{\let`\noligaturesquoteleft}
 }
 
 \let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
 \let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
+%
 \let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
 \let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
+%
+\let\markupsetuplqkbd     \markupsetcodequoteleft
+\let\markupsetuprqkbd     \markupsetcodequoteright
+%
+\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft
+\let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright
+%
 \let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
 \let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
+%
 \let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
 \let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
 
-\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft
-\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft
-
-% Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right
-% quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote
-% from cmtt (char 0x0d).  The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it
-% the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least
-% evince), the lilypond developers report.  xpdf does work with the
-% regular 0x27.
+% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe
+% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d).
+% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it
+% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the
+% lilypond developers report.  xpdf does work with the regular 0x27.
 %
 \def\codequoteright{%
   \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
@@ -2499,33 +2383,85 @@ end
   \else \char'22 \fi
 }
 
+% Commands to set the quote options.
+% 
+\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\onword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
+      = t%
+  \else\ifx\temp\offword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
+      = \relax
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+%
+\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\onword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
+      = t%
+  \else\ifx\temp\offword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
+      = \relax
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
 \def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
 
 % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
 \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
 
-%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
-%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
+% Font commands.
 
-% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
-% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
-\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
-                    \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
-\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
-\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant.
+% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl,
+% and 2) do not add an italic correction.
+\def\dosmartslant#1#2{%
+  \ifusingtt 
+    {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}%
+    {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}%
+  \next
+}
+\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl}
+\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it}
 
-% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
-% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
-\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following
+% character) is such as not to need one.
+\def\smartitaliccorrection{%
+  \ifx\next,%
+  \else\ifx\next-%
+  \else\ifx\next.%
+  \else\ifx\next\.%
+  \else\ifx\next\comma%
+  \else\ptexslash
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \aftersmartic
+}
 
+% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic.  @var is set to this for defuns.
+\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}}
+
 % @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl.  We never want
 % ttsl for book titles, do we?
-\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}
 
+\def\aftersmartic{}
+\def\var#1{%
+  \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic
+  \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}%
+  \smartslanted{#1}%
+}
+
 \let\i=\smartitalic
 \let\slanted=\smartslanted
-\def\var#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\smartslanted{#1}}}
 \let\dfn=\smartslanted
 \let\emph=\smartitalic
 
@@ -2554,8 +2490,8 @@ end
 %
 \catcode`@=11
   \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
-    \sfcode\dotChar  =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
-    \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
+    \sfcode`\.=\@m \sfcode`\?=\@m \sfcode`\!=\@m
+    \sfcode`\:=\@m \sfcode`\;=\@m \sfcode`\,=\@m
     \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
   }
   \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
@@ -2575,34 +2511,12 @@ end
 % @samp.
 \def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
 
-% definition of @key that produces a lozenge.  Doesn't adjust to text size.
-%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
-%\font\keysy=cmsy9
-%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
-%  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
-%    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
-%     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
-%    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
-%  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
+% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes.
+\let\indicateurl=\samp
 
-% definition of @key with no lozenge.  If the current font is already
-% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle.  But
-% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
-%
-\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
-  \nohyphenation
-  \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
-  #1}\null}
-
-% ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command.
-\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
-
-% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
-\let\file=\samp
-\let\option=\samp
-
-% @code is a modification of @t,
-% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
+% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same
+% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc.
+% This is a subroutine for that.
 \def\tclose#1{%
   {%
     % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
@@ -2621,18 +2535,18 @@ end
     \plainfrenchspacing
     #1%
   }%
-  \null
+  \null % reset spacefactor to 1000
 }
 
 % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
+% (But see \codedashfinish below.)
 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
-
+%
 % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
 % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
 % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
-% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
-%  -- rms.
+% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms.
 {
   \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
   \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
@@ -2646,15 +2560,38 @@ end
      \let-\codedash
      \let_\codeunder
     \else
-     \let-\realdash
+     \let-\normaldash
      \let_\realunder
     \fi
+    % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break
+    % after the hyphen.
+    \global\let\codedashprev=\codedash
+    %
     \codex
   }
+  %
+  \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish}
+  \gdef\codedashfinish{%
+    \normaldash % always output the dash character itself.
+    % 
+    % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless
+    % (a) the next character is a -, or
+    % (b) the preceding character is a -.
+    % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -.
+    % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b.
+    \ifx\next\codedash \else
+      \ifx\codedashprev\codedash 
+      \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi
+    \fi
+    % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a
+    % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise.  As in @code{- a}.
+    \global\let\codedashprev= \next
+  }
 }
+\def\normaldash{-}
+%
+\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
 
-\def\realdash{-}
-\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
 \def\codeunder{%
   % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _
   % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
@@ -2666,12 +2603,11 @@ end
              \discretionary{}{}{}}%
             {\_}%
 }
-\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
 
 % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
-% each of the four underscores in __typeof__.  This is undesirable in
-% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
-% general.  @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
+% each of the four underscores in __typeof__.  This is bad.
+% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at -
+% and _ on and off.
 %
 \newif\ifallowcodebreaks  \allowcodebreakstrue
 
@@ -2686,83 +2622,135 @@ end
     \allowcodebreaksfalse
   \else
     \errhelp = \EMsimple
-    \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}%
+    \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}%
   \fi\fi
 }
 
-% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
-% then @kbd has no effect.
-\def\kbd#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}}
-
-% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
-%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
-%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
-\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
-  \def\txiarg{#1}%
-  \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
-    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
-  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
-    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
-  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
-    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
-  \else
-    \errhelp = \EMsimple
-    \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}%
-  \fi\fi\fi
-}
-\def\worddistinct{distinct}
-\def\wordexample{example}
-\def\wordcode{code}
-
-% Default is `distinct'.
-\kbdinputstyle distinct
-
-\def\xkey{\key}
-\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
-\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
-\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
-\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi}
-
-% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
-\let\indicateurl=\code
-\let\env=\code
+% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary,
+% so use \code rather than \samp.
 \let\command=\code
+\let\env=\code
+\let\file=\code
+\let\option=\code
 
-% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
-\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
+% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional
+% (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and
+% an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in
+% addition to) the url itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.
 
-% @clickstyle @arrow   (by default)
-\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
-\def\click{\arrow}
+% TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second
+% arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target).
+\newif\ifurefurlonlylink
 
-% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
-% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
-% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
-% itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
-% a hypertex \special here.
+% The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected
+% places within the url.  (There used to be another version, which
+% didn't support automatic breaking.)
+\def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak}
+\let\uref=\urefbreak
 %
-\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
-\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
+\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish}
+\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example
   \unsepspaces
   \pdfurl{#1}%
   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
   \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
     \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
   \else
-    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg
     \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
       \ifpdf
-        \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
+        \ifurefurlonlylink
+          % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg
+          \unhbox0             
+        \else
+          % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency,
+          % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc.
+          \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})%
+        \fi
       \else
-        \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
+        \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url
       \fi
     \else
-      \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
+      \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it
     \fi
   \fi
   \endlink
 \endgroup}
 
+% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only).
+\def\urefcatcodes{%
+  \catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\.=\active
+  \catcode`\#=\active \catcode`\?=\active
+  \catcode`\/=\active
+}
+{
+  \urefcatcodes
+  %
+  \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup
+    \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
+    \urefcatcodes
+    \let&\urefcodeamp
+    \let.\urefcodedot
+    \let#\urefcodehash
+    \let?\urefcodequest
+    \let/\urefcodeslash
+    \codex
+  }
+  %
+  % By default, they are just regular characters.
+  \global\def&{\normalamp}
+  \global\def.{\normaldot}
+  \global\def#{\normalhash}
+  \global\def?{\normalquest}
+  \global\def/{\normalslash}
+}
+
+% we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help
+% line breaking of long url's.  The unequal skips make look better in
+% cmtt at least, especially for dots.
+\def\urefprestretchamount{.13em}
+\def\urefpoststretchamount{.1em}
+\def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus\urefprestretchamount\relax}
+\def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus\urefprestretchamount\relax}
+%
+\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch}
+\def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch}
+\def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch}
+\def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch}
+\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish}
+{
+  \catcode`\/=\active
+  \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{%
+    \urefprestretch \slashChar
+    % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of
+    % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://.
+    \ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi
+  }
+}
+
+% One more complication: by default we'll break after the special
+% characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so
+% allow that.  Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control.
+% 
+\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{%
+  \def\txiarg{#1}%
+  \ifx\txiarg\wordnone
+    \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore
+    \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter
+    \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak}
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\wordafter{after}
+\def\wordbefore{before}
+\def\wordnone{none}
+
+\urefbreakstyle after
+
 % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
 %
 \let\url=\uref
@@ -2784,16 +2772,72 @@ end
   \let\email=\uref
 \fi
 
+% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
+%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
+%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
+\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
+  \def\txiarg{#1}%
+  \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\worddistinct{distinct}
+\def\wordexample{example}
+\def\wordcode{code}
+
+% Default is `distinct'.
+\kbdinputstyle distinct
+
+% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
+% then @kbd has no effect.
+\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}}
+
+\def\xkey{\key}
+\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{%
+  \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
+  \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
+  \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
+  \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
+}
+
+% definition of @key that produces a lozenge.  Doesn't adjust to text size.
+%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+%\font\keysy=cmsy9
+%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
+%  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
+%    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
+%     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
+%    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
+%  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
+
+% definition of @key with no lozenge.  If the current font is already
+% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle.  But
+% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
+%
+\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
+  \nohyphenation
+  \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
+  #1}\null}
+
+% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
+\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
+
+% @clickstyle @arrow   (by default)
+\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
+\def\click{\arrow}
+
 % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
 % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
 %
 \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
 
-% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
-% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
-% Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
-%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
-
 % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
 % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
 % all-uppercase.
@@ -2805,6 +2849,7 @@ end
   \ifx\temp\empty \else
     \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
   \fi
+  \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
 }
 
 % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
@@ -2817,11 +2862,266 @@ end
   \ifx\temp\empty \else
     \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
   \fi
+  \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
 }
 
+% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
+%
+\def\asis#1{#1}
 
+% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
+%
+% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
+% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
+% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
+% which is what @var uses.
+{
+  \catcode`\_ = \active
+  \gdef\mathunderscore{%
+    \catcode`\_=\active
+    \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
+  }
+}
+% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \.
+% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no
+% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care.
+%
+% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
+\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
+%
+\def\math{%
+  \ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already
+    \tex
+    \mathunderscore
+    \let\\ = \mathbackslash
+    \mathactive
+    % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
+    \let\"=\ddot
+    \let\'=\acute
+    \let\==\bar
+    \let\^=\hat
+    \let\`=\grave
+    \let\u=\breve
+    \let\v=\check
+    \let\~=\tilde
+    \let\dotaccent=\dot
+    % have to provide another name for sup operator
+    \let\mathopsup=\sup
+  $\expandafter\finishmath\fi
+}
+\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup}  % Close the group opened by \tex.
+
+% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
+% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
+% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
+%
+{
+  \catcode`^ = \active
+  \catcode`< = \active
+  \catcode`> = \active
+  \catcode`+ = \active
+  \catcode`' = \active
+  \gdef\mathactive{%
+    \let^ = \ptexhat
+    \let< = \ptexless
+    \let> = \ptexgtr
+    \let+ = \ptexplus
+    \let' = \ptexquoteright
+  }
+}
+
+% for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript.
+% If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch
+% into text mode, with smaller fonts.  This is a different font than the
+% one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not
+% fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices.
+%
+\def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi}
+\def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize #1}}$}%
+%
+\def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi}
+\def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize #1}}$}%
+
+% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}.
+% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex,
+% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about.
+% 
+\def\outfmtnametex{tex}
+%
+\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish}
+\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{%
+  \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
+  \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
+}
+% 
+% @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if
+% FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT.
+\long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish}
+\long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{%
+  \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
+  \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi
+}
+%
+% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid
+% setting catcodes prematurely.  Doing it this way means that, for
+% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being
+% ignored.  But this isn't important because if people want a literal
+% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as
+% well use a command to get a left brace too.  We could re-use the
+% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill.
+% 
+\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw}
+\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish}
+\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{%
+  \def\inlinerawname{#1}%
+  \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
+  \endgroup % close group opened by \tex.
+}
+
+% @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set.
+%
+\long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish}
+\long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{%
+  \def\inlinevarname{#1}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax
+  \else\ignorespaces#2\fi
+}
+
+% @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set.
+%
+\long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish}
+\long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{%
+  \def\inlinevarname{#1}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi
+}
+
+
 \message{glyphs,}
+% and logos.
 
+% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}.
+\def\@{\char64 }
+\let\atchar=\@
+
+% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters.
+% Unless we're in typewriter, use \ecfont because the CM text fonts do
+% not have braces, and we don't want to switch into math.
+\def\mylbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char123}}
+\def\myrbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char125}}
+\let\{=\mylbrace \let\lbracechar=\{
+\let\}=\myrbrace \let\rbracechar=\}
+\begingroup
+  % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
+  % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
+  \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
+  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
+  \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
+  !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
+  !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
+  !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
+  !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
+!endgroup
+
+% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
+\let\comma = ,
+
+% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
+% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
+\let\, = \ptexc
+\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot
+\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
+\let\tieaccent = \ptext
+\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb
+\let\udotaccent = \d
+
+% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
+% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
+\def\questiondown{?`}
+\def\exclamdown{!`}
+\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
+\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
+
+% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
+\def\imacro{i}
+\def\jmacro{j}
+\def\dotless#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
+  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
+  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
+% period following counts as ending a sentence.  (Idea found in latex.)
+%
+\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @LaTeX{} logo.  Not quite the same results as the definition in
+% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
+% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
+% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
+% \scriptscriptstyle).
+%
+\def\LaTeX{%
+  L\kern-.36em
+  {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
+   \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{%
+     \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt
+       % for 10pt running text, \lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX.
+       % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt.
+       \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$%
+     \else
+       % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize.
+       \selectfonts\lllsize A%
+     \fi
+     }%
+     \vss
+  }}%
+  \kern-.15em
+  \TeX
+}
+
+% Some math mode symbols.  Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode
+% unless we are already there.  Expansion tricks may not be needed here,
+% but safer, and can't hurt.
+\def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi}
+\def\ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$}
+%
+\def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet}
+\def\geq{\ensuremath\ge}
+\def\leq{\ensuremath\le}
+\def\minus{\ensuremath-}
+
+% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
+% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
+% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
+% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em.  So do
+% whichever is larger.
+%
+\def\dots{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
+  \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
+    \dimen0 = \wd0
+  \else
+    \dimen0 = 1.5em
+  \fi
+  \hbox to \dimen0{%
+    \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
+    .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
+    .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
+    .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
+  }%
+}
+
+% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
+%
+\def\enddots{%
+  \dots
+  \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
+}
+
 % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
 %
 % Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
@@ -2842,7 +3142,7 @@ end
 {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
 \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
-\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt}
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt}
 %
 \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
    \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
@@ -2955,20 +3255,32 @@ end
 \def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
 \def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
 %
-% Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs.
-\def\ecfont{%
+% Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format)
+% for non-CM glyphs.  That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text
+% companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding).  Both are part of the ec
+% package and follow the same conventions.
+% 
+\def\ecfont{\etcfont{e}}
+\def\tcfont{\etcfont{t}}
+%
+\def\etcfont#1{%
   % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
   % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
   % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
   % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
   \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
   \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
-  \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
-    % bold:
-    \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
+  \ifmonospace
+    % typewriter:
+    \font\thisecfont = #1ctt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
   \else
-    % regular:
-    \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
+    \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
+      % bold:
+      \font\thisecfont = #1cb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
+    \else
+      % regular:
+      \font\thisecfont = #1c\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
+    \fi
   \fi
   \thisecfont
 }
@@ -2991,7 +3303,7 @@ end
 %  Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14)  (68K)  16 APR 2004 02:38
 % so we'll define it if necessary.
 %
-\ifx\Orb\undefined
+\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined
 \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
 \fi
 
@@ -3019,8 +3331,9 @@ end
 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
  \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
 
-\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
-        \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
+\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{%
+  \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
+  \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
 
 \envdef\titlepage{%
   % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
@@ -3080,14 +3393,28 @@ end
   \finishedtitlepagetrue
 }
 
-%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
+% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation,
+% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right.  This should be used
+% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first.  Because
+% it is always used for titles, nothing else, we call \rmisbold.  \par
+% should be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group.
+% 
+\def\raggedtitlesettings{%
+  \rmisbold
+  \hyphenpenalty=10000
+  \parindent=0pt
+  \tolerance=5000
+  \ptexraggedright
+}
 
+% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
+
 \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
 \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
 
 \parseargdef\title{%
   \checkenv\titlepage
-  \leftline{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}
+  \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
   % print a rule at the page bottom also.
   \finishedtitlepagefalse
   \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
@@ -3113,7 +3440,7 @@ end
 }
 
 
-%%% Set up page headings and footings.
+% Set up page headings and footings.
 
 \let\thispage=\folio
 
@@ -3122,7 +3449,7 @@ end
 \newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
 \newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
 
-% Now make TeX use those variables
+% Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables
 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
                             \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
@@ -3178,6 +3505,10 @@ end
 % @everyheadingmarks
 % @everyfootingmarks
 
+% These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks,
+% \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of
+% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks.
+%
 \def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
 \def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
 \def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
@@ -3207,10 +3538,14 @@ end
 
 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
 
-\def\HEADINGSoff{%
-\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
-\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
-\HEADINGSoff
+\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination
+  \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
+   \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
+}
+
+\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting
+\HEADINGSoff  % it's the default
+
 % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
 % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
@@ -3221,7 +3556,7 @@ end
 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}}
 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
 }
 \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
@@ -3232,8 +3567,8 @@ end
 \global\pageno=1
 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
-\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}}
 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
 }
 \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
@@ -3244,7 +3579,7 @@ end
 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}}
 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
 }
 
@@ -3252,8 +3587,8 @@ end
 \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
-\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}}
 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
 }
 
@@ -3261,7 +3596,7 @@ end
 % This produces Day Month Year style of output.
 % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
 % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
-\ifx\today\undefined
+\ifx\today\thisisundefined
 \def\today{%
   \number\day\space
   \ifcase\month
@@ -3322,7 +3657,7 @@ end
     \begingroup
       \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
       \advance\hsize by\tableindent
-      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
+      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax
       \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
     \endgroup
     %
@@ -3431,7 +3766,7 @@ end
   \parskip=\smallskipamount
   \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
   %
-  % Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says
+  % Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says
   % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
   % right away at the @itemize.  It's not the best error message in the
   % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item.  This means if
@@ -3463,7 +3798,12 @@ end
    \noindent
    \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
    %
-   \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
+   \ifinner\else
+     \vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item.
+   \fi
+   % We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an
+   % @itemize looks awful there.
+  }%
   \flushcr
 }
 
@@ -3681,19 +4021,23 @@ end
 }
 
 % multitable-only commands.
-%
-% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
-% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
-% of an alignment entry.  \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to
+% 
+% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.  Assignments
+% have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an
+% alignment entry.  \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to
 % undo it ourselves.
 \def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
 \def\headitem{%
   \checkenv\multitable
   \crcr
+  \gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings
   \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
   \the\everytab % for the first item
 }%
 %
+% default for tables with no headings.
+\let\headitemcrhook=\relax
+%
 % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template
 % line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just `&' until
 % we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
@@ -3724,15 +4068,15 @@ end
   %
   \everycr = {%
     \noalign{%
-      \global\everytab={}%
+      \global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem.
       \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
-      % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
+      %
+      % Check for saved footnotes, etc.:
       \checkinserts
-      % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
-      %\filbreak
-	% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
-	% table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the
-	% problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
+      %
+      % Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset:
+      \headitemcrhook
+      \global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax
     }%
   }%
   %
@@ -3808,18 +4152,18 @@ end
 \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
 \fi
-%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
-%% table. If not, do nothing.
-%%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
+% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
+% table. If not, do nothing.
+%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
 \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
-\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
-                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      % than skip between lines in the table.
 \fi%
 \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
-\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
-                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      % than skip between lines in the table.
 \fi}
 
 
@@ -3971,7 +4315,7 @@ end
 \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
 \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
 {
-  \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
+  \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
   %
   \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
     \let\value = \expandablevalue
@@ -3980,7 +4324,7 @@ end
     % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
     % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
     % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
-    \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
+    \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore
   }
 }
 
@@ -3991,7 +4335,12 @@ end
 % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
 % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
 % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
-%
+% 
+% Unfortunately, this has the consequence that when _ is in the *value*
+% of an @set, it does not print properly in the roman fonts (get the cmr
+% dot accent at position 126 instead).  No fix comes to mind, and it's
+% been this way since 2003 or earlier, so just ignore it.
+% 
 \def\expandablevalue#1{%
   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
     {[No value for ``#1'']}%
@@ -4003,9 +4352,10 @@ end
 
 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
 % with @set.
+% 
+% To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call
+% \makecond and then redefine.
 %
-% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
-%
 \makecond{ifset}
 \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
 \def\doifset#1#2{%
@@ -4020,7 +4370,7 @@ end
 }
 \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
 
-% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
+% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been
 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
 %
 % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
@@ -4031,6 +4381,35 @@ end
 \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
 \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
 
+% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written
+% without the @) is in fact defined.  We can only feasibly check at the
+% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered
+% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command.
+% 
+\makecond{ifcommanddefined}
+\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}}
+%
+\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \let\next=\empty
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax
+      #1% If not defined, \let\next as above.
+    \fi
+    \expandafter
+  }\next
+}
+\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}}
+
+% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above.
+\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined}
+\def\ifcommandnotdefined{%
+  \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}}
+\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}}
+
+% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to
+% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available.
+\set txicommandconditionals
+
 % @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
 % which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
 \let\dircategory=\comment
@@ -4046,19 +4425,16 @@ end
 % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
 \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
 
-% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
-% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
-% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
-% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
-% the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
+% \newindex {foo} defines an index named IX.
+% It automatically defines \IXindex such that
+% \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX.
+% It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for
+% the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is IX.
 % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
 % for the sake of vms.
 %
 \def\newindex#1{%
-  \iflinks
-    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
-    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
-  \fi
+  \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0
   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
     \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
 }
@@ -4072,15 +4448,20 @@ end
 \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
 %
 \def\newcodeindex#1{%
-  \iflinks
-    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
-    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
-  \fi
+  \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0
   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
     \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
 }
 
+% The default indices:
+\newindex{cp}%      concepts,
+\newcodeindex{fn}%  functions,
+\newcodeindex{vr}%  variables,
+\newcodeindex{tp}%  types,
+\newcodeindex{ky}%  keys
+\newcodeindex{pg}%  and programs.
 
+
 % @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
 % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
 %
@@ -4108,64 +4489,34 @@ end
   \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
 }
 
-% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
+% Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros.
 % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
-%  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
+% and it the two-letter name of the index.
 
-% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
-% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
+\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx}
+\def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
 
-% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
-% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
-
-\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
-\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
-
 % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
-\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
-\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
+\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx}
+\def\docodeindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
 
-% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
-% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
-% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
+% Used when writing an index entry out to an index file, to prevent
+% expansion of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
 %
 \def\indexdummies{%
   \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
   \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
   \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
   %
-  % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
-  % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
-  % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
-  \let\{ = \mylbrace
-  \let\} = \myrbrace
+  % Need these unexpandable (because we define \tt as a dummy)
+  % definitions when @{ or @} appear in index entry text.  Also, more
+  % complicated, when \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
+  % We can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
+  % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.  Perhaps we
+  % should use @lbracechar and @rbracechar?
+  \def\{{{\tt\char123}}%
+  \def\}{{\tt\char125}}%
   %
-  % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
-  % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
-  % causes processing to be prematurely terminated.  This is,
-  % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
-  % is an expandable command.  The redefinition below makes \endinput
-  % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
-  % processing continues to some further point.  On the other hand, it
-  % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
-  % is still getting written without apparent harm.
-  %
-  % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
-  % help-texinfo, 22may06):
-  % @macro funindex {WORD}
-  % @findex xyz
-  % @end macro
-  % ...
-  % @funindex commtest
-  %
-  % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
-  %
-  % Sample whatsit resulting:
-  % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
-  %
-  % So:
-  \let\endinput = \empty
-  %
   % Do the redefinitions.
   \commondummies
 }
@@ -4189,9 +4540,8 @@ end
 % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
 %
 \def\commondummies{%
-  %
   % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
-  % preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control% words,
+  % preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control words,
   % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
   % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
   % from whatever follows.
@@ -4210,6 +4560,7 @@ end
   \commondummiesnofonts
   %
   \definedummyletter\_%
+  \definedummyletter\-%
   %
   % Non-English letters.
   \definedummyword\AA
@@ -4246,20 +4597,26 @@ end
   \definedummyword\TeX
   %
   % Assorted special characters.
+  \definedummyword\arrow
   \definedummyword\bullet
   \definedummyword\comma
   \definedummyword\copyright
   \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
   \definedummyword\dots
   \definedummyword\enddots
+  \definedummyword\entrybreak
   \definedummyword\equiv
   \definedummyword\error
   \definedummyword\euro
+  \definedummyword\expansion
+  \definedummyword\geq
   \definedummyword\guillemetleft
   \definedummyword\guillemetright
   \definedummyword\guilsinglleft
   \definedummyword\guilsinglright
-  \definedummyword\expansion
+  \definedummyword\lbracechar
+  \definedummyword\leq
+  \definedummyword\mathopsup
   \definedummyword\minus
   \definedummyword\ogonek
   \definedummyword\pounds
@@ -4271,7 +4628,10 @@ end
   \definedummyword\quoteleft
   \definedummyword\quoteright
   \definedummyword\quotesinglbase
+  \definedummyword\rbracechar
   \definedummyword\result
+  \definedummyword\sub
+  \definedummyword\sup
   \definedummyword\textdegree
   %
   % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
@@ -4285,6 +4645,8 @@ end
 }
 
 % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
+% Define \definedumyletter, \definedummyaccent and \definedummyword before
+% using.
 %
 \def\commondummiesnofonts{%
   % Control letters and accents.
@@ -4316,19 +4678,27 @@ end
   \definedummyword\b
   \definedummyword\i
   \definedummyword\r
+  \definedummyword\sansserif
   \definedummyword\sc
+  \definedummyword\slanted
   \definedummyword\t
   %
   % Commands that take arguments.
+  \definedummyword\abbr
   \definedummyword\acronym
+  \definedummyword\anchor
   \definedummyword\cite
   \definedummyword\code
   \definedummyword\command
   \definedummyword\dfn
+  \definedummyword\dmn
   \definedummyword\email
   \definedummyword\emph
   \definedummyword\env
   \definedummyword\file
+  \definedummyword\image
+  \definedummyword\indicateurl
+  \definedummyword\inforef
   \definedummyword\kbd
   \definedummyword\key
   \definedummyword\math
@@ -4338,6 +4708,7 @@ end
   \definedummyword\samp
   \definedummyword\strong
   \definedummyword\tie
+  \definedummyword\U
   \definedummyword\uref
   \definedummyword\url
   \definedummyword\var
@@ -4346,6 +4717,52 @@ end
   \definedummyword\xref
 }
 
+% For testing: output @{ and @} in index sort strings as \{ and \}.
+\newif\ifusebracesinindexes
+
+\let\indexlbrace\relax
+\let\indexrbrace\relax
+
+{\catcode`\@=0
+\catcode`\\=13
+  @gdef@backslashdisappear{@def\{}}
+}
+
+{
+\catcode`\<=13
+\catcode`\-=13
+\catcode`\`=13
+  \gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{%
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax\else
+      % @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term.
+      % (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.)
+      \let`=\empty
+    \fi
+    %
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexbackslashignore\endcsname\relax\else
+      \backslashdisappear
+    \fi
+    %
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexhyphenignore\endcsname\relax\else
+      \def-{}%
+    \fi
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlessthanignore\endcsname\relax\else
+      \def<{}%
+    \fi
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexatsignignore\endcsname\relax\else
+      \def\@{}%
+    \fi
+  }
+
+  \gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{%
+    \useindexbackslash
+    \let-\normaldash
+    \let<\normalless
+    \def\@{@}%
+  }
+}
+
+
 % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
 % by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all
 % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
@@ -4356,9 +4773,8 @@ end
   \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
   % We can just ignore other control letters.
   \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
-  % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
+  % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below.
   \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
-  %
   \commondummiesnofonts
   %
   % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
@@ -4368,9 +4784,14 @@ end
   %
   \def\ { }%
   \def\@{@}%
-  % how to handle braces?
   \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
+  \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting
   %
+  \uccode`\1=`\{ \uppercase{\def\{{1}}%
+  \uccode`\1=`\} \uppercase{\def\}{1}}%
+  \let\lbracechar\{%
+  \let\rbracechar\}%
+  %
   % Non-English letters.
   \def\AA{AA}%
   \def\AE{AE}%
@@ -4378,7 +4799,7 @@ end
   \def\L{L}%
   \def\OE{OE}%
   \def\O{O}%
-  \def\TH{ZZZ}%
+  \def\TH{TH}%
   \def\aa{aa}%
   \def\ae{ae}%
   \def\dh{dzz}%
@@ -4390,13 +4811,14 @@ end
   \def\o{o}%
   \def\questiondown{?}%
   \def\ss{ss}%
-  \def\th{zzz}%
+  \def\th{th}%
   %
   \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
   \def\TeX{TeX}%
   %
   % Assorted special characters.
   % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
+  \def\arrow{->}%
   \def\bullet{bullet}%
   \def\comma{,}%
   \def\copyright{copyright}%
@@ -4406,10 +4828,12 @@ end
   \def\error{error}%
   \def\euro{euro}%
   \def\expansion{==>}%
+  \def\geq{>=}%
   \def\guillemetleft{<<}%
   \def\guillemetright{>>}%
   \def\guilsinglleft{<}%
   \def\guilsinglright{>}%
+  \def\leq{<=}%
   \def\minus{-}%
   \def\point{.}%
   \def\pounds{pounds}%
@@ -4437,14 +4861,18 @@ end
   \macrolist
 }
 
-\let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
+
 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
 
 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
 % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
 \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
 
-% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
+% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
+% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
+% TODO: Two-level index?  Operation index?
+
+% Workhorse for all indexes.
 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
 % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
 % is with most defuns, which call us directly).
@@ -4452,6 +4880,7 @@ end
 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
   \iflinks
   {%
+    \requireopenindexfile{#1}%
     % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
     \toks0 = {#2}%
     % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
@@ -4467,7 +4896,49 @@ end
   \fi
 }
 
-% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
+% Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it.
+\def\requireopenindexfile#1{%
+\ifnum\csname #1indfile\endcsname=0
+  \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+  \edef\suffix{#1}%
+  % A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output
+  % of -recorder, so use .f1s instead.
+  \ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1}\fi
+  % Open the file
+  \immediate\openout\csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.\suffix
+  % Using \immediate here prevents an object entering into the current box,
+  % which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for preceding
+  % skips.
+\fi}
+\def\indexisfl{fl}
+
+% Output \ as {\indexbackslash}, because \ is an escape character in
+% the index files.
+\let\indexbackslash=\relax
+{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
+  @gdef@useindexbackslash{@def\{{@indexbackslash}}}
+}
+
+% Definition for writing index entry text.
+\def\sortas#1{\ignorespaces}%
+
+% Definition for writing index entry sort key.  Should occur at the at
+% the beginning of the index entry, like
+%     @cindex @sortas{september} \september
+% The \ignorespaces takes care of following space, but there's no way
+% to remove space before it.
+{
+\catcode`\-=13
+\gdef\indexwritesortas{%
+  \begingroup
+  \indexnonalnumreappear
+  \indexwritesortasxxx}
+\gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{%
+  \xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup}
+}
+
+
+% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file.
 %
 \def\dosubindwrite{%
   % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
@@ -4477,14 +4948,26 @@ end
   %
   % Remember, we are within a group.
   \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
-  \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
-      % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
+  \useindexbackslash % \indexbackslash isn't defined now so it will be output 
+                     % as is; and it will print as backslash.
+  % The braces around \indexbrace are recognized by texindex.
   %
-  % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
-  % get the string to sort by.
+  % Get the string to sort by, by processing the index entry with all
+  % font commands turned off.
   {\indexnofonts
-   \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
-   \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
+   \def\lbracechar{{\indexlbrace}}%
+   \def\rbracechar{{\indexrbrace}}%
+   \let\{=\lbracechar
+   \let\}=\rbracechar
+   \indexnonalnumdisappear
+   \xdef\indexsortkey{}%
+   \let\sortas=\indexwritesortas
+   \edef\temp{\the\toks0}%
+   \setbox\dummybox = \hbox{\temp}% Make sure to execute any \sortas
+   \ifx\indexsortkey\empty
+     \xdef\indexsortkey{\temp}%
+     \ifx\indexsortkey\empty\xdef\indexsortkey{ }\fi
+   \fi
   }%
   %
   % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
@@ -4494,10 +4977,11 @@ end
   % sorted result.
   \edef\temp{%
     \write\writeto{%
-      \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
+      \string\entry{\indexsortkey}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
   }%
   \temp
 }
+\newbox\dummybox % used above
 
 % Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
 %
@@ -4534,10 +5018,9 @@ end
 %
 % ..., ready, GO:
 %
-\def\safewhatsit#1{%
-\ifhmode
+\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode
   #1%
-\else
+ \else
   % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
   \whatsitskip = \lastskip
   \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
@@ -4561,7 +5044,6 @@ end
     % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
     % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
     % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint.  For example:
-    %
     %   @deffn deffn-whatever
     %   @vindex index-whatever
     %   Description.
@@ -4574,8 +5056,7 @@ end
     % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
     \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
   \fi
-\fi
-}
+\fi}
 
 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
 %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
@@ -4626,7 +5107,9 @@ end
   % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
   % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
   \catcode`\@ = 11
-  \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
+  % See comment in \requireopenindexfile.
+  \def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1}\fi
+  \openin 1 \jobname.\indexname s
   \ifeof 1
     % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
     % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
@@ -4634,43 +5117,96 @@ end
     % there is some text.
     \putwordIndexNonexistent
   \else
+    \catcode`\\ = 0
+    \escapechar = `\\
     %
     % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
     % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
     % it can discover if there is anything in it.
-    \read 1 to \temp
+    \read 1 to \thisline
     \ifeof 1
       \putwordIndexIsEmpty
     \else
       % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
       % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
       % to make right now.
-      \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
-      \catcode`\\ = 0
-      \escapechar = `\\
+      \def\indexbackslash{\ttbackslash}%
+      \let\indexlbrace\{   % Likewise, set these sequences for braces
+      \let\indexrbrace\}   % used in the sort key.
       \begindoublecolumns
-      \input \jobname.#1s
+      \let\entryorphanpenalty=\indexorphanpenalty
+      %
+      % Read input from the index file line by line.
+      \loopdo
+        \ifeof1
+          \let\firsttoken\relax
+        \else
+          \read 1 to \nextline
+          \edef\act{\gdef\noexpand\firsttoken{\getfirsttoken\nextline}}%
+          \act
+        \fi
+        \thisline
+        %
+        \ifeof1\else
+        \let\thisline\nextline
+      \repeat
+      %%
       \enddoublecolumns
     \fi
   \fi
   \closein 1
 \endgroup}
 
+\def\getfirsttoken#1{\expandafter\getfirsttokenx#1\endfirsttoken}
+\long\def\getfirsttokenx#1#2\endfirsttoken{\noexpand#1}
+
+\def\loopdo#1\repeat{\def\body{#1}\loopdoxxx}
+\def\loopdoxxx{\let\next=\relax\body\let\next=\loopdoxxx\fi\next}
+
 % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
 % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
 
-\def\initial#1{{%
-  % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
-  \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
+{\catcode`\/=13 \catcode`\-=13 \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\_=13
+\catcode`\|=13 \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13 \catcode`\+=13 \catcode`\"=13
+\catcode`\$=3
+\gdef\initialglyphs{%
+  % Some changes for non-alphabetic characters.  Using the glyphs from the
+  % math fonts looks more consistent than the typewriter font used elsewhere
+  % for these characters.
+  \def\indexbackslash{\math{\backslash}}%
+  \let\\=\indexbackslash
   %
+  % Can't get bold backslash so don't use bold forward slash
+  \catcode`\/=13
+  \def/{{\secrmnotbold \normalslash}}%
+  \def-{{\normaldash\normaldash}}% en dash `--'
+  \def^{{\chapbf \normalcaret}}%
+  \def~{{\chapbf \normaltilde}}%
+  \def\_{%
+     \leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }%
+  \def|{$\vert$}%
+  \def<{$\less$}%
+  \def>{$\gtr$}%
+  \def+{$\normalplus$}%
+}}
+
+\def\initial{%
+  \bgroup
+  \initialglyphs
+  \initialx
+}
+
+\def\initialx#1{%
   % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
   \removelastskip
   %
   % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
+  % The glue before the bonus allows a little bit of space at the
+  % bottom of a column to reduce an increase in inter-line spacing.
   \nobreak
-  \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
-  \penalty 0
-  \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
+  \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip
+  \penalty -300 
+  \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip
   %
   % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
   % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
@@ -4678,25 +5214,24 @@ end
   % we need before each entry, but it's better.
   %
   % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
-  \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
-  \leftline{\secbf #1}%
+  \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus 1\baselineskip
+  \leftline{\secfonts \kern-0.05em \secbf #1}%
+  % \secfonts is inside the argument of \leftline so that the change of
+  % \baselineskip will not affect any glue inserted before the vbox that
+  % \leftline creates.
   % Do our best not to break after the initial.
   \nobreak
   \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
-}}
+  \egroup % \initialglyphs
+}
 
+\newdimen\entryrightmargin
+\entryrightmargin=0pt
+
 % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
 % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin.  It is used for index
 % and table of contents entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
 %
-% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
-%	\def\entry#1#2{...
-% But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
-% @code, which sets - active.  This problem was fixed by a kludge---
-% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
-%
-% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
-%                                 --kasal, 21nov03
 \def\entry{%
   \begingroup
     %
@@ -4704,78 +5239,182 @@ end
     % affect previous text.
     \par
     %
-    % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
-    \parfillskip = 0in
-    %
     % No extra space above this paragraph.
     \parskip = 0in
     %
-    % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
-    \finalhyphendemerits = 0
+    % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks
+    % from @* into spaces.  The user might give these in long section
+    % titles, for instance.
+    \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
+    \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% An undocumented command
     %
-    % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
-    % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
-    % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
-    % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
-    % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
-    %
-    % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
-    % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
-    \hangindent = 2em
-    %
-    % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
-    % with blank space.
-    \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
-    %
     % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
     % columns.
-    \vskip 0pt plus1pt
+    \vskip 0pt plus0.5pt
     %
     % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
     \afterassignment\doentry
     \let\temp =
 }
+\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
 \def\doentry{%
+    % Save the text of the entry
+    \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup
     \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
       \noindent
       \aftergroup\finishentry
       % And now comes the text of the entry.
+      % Not absorbing as a macro argument reduces the chance of problems
+      % with catcodes occurring.
 }
-\def\finishentry#1{%
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\finishentry#1{%
+    \egroup % end box A
+    \dimen@ = \wd\boxA % Length of text of entry
+    \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup\unhbox\boxA
     % #1 is the page number.
     %
-    % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
-    % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
-    % cursed by a Unix daemon.
-    \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
-    \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
-      \ %
+    % Get the width of the page numbers, and only use
+    % leaders if they are present.
+    \global\setbox\boxB = \hbox{#1}%
+    \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt
+      \null\nobreak\hfill\ %
     \else
       %
-      % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
-      % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
-      % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
-      \hfil\penalty50
       \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
       %
-      % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
-      % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
-      % \hbox ensues.
       \ifpdf
-	\pdfgettoks#1.%
-	\ \the\toksA
+        \pdfgettoks#1.%
+        \bgroup\let\domark\relax
+          \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA
+        \egroup
+        % The redefinion of \domark stops marks being added in \pdflink to 
+        % preserve coloured links across page boundaries.  Otherwise the marks
+        % would get in the way of \lastbox in \insertindexentrybox.
       \else
-	\ #1%
+        \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable #1%
       \fi
     \fi
-    \par
+    \egroup % end \boxA
+    \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt
+      \global\setbox\entryindexbox=\vbox{\unhbox\boxA}%
+    \else
+    \global\setbox\entryindexbox=\vbox\bgroup
+      \prevdepth=\entrylinedepth
+      \noindent
+      % We want the text of the entries to be aligned to the left, and the
+      % page numbers to be aligned to the right.
+      %
+      \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+      \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus -1fill
+      \rightskip = 0pt plus -1fil
+      \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fill
+      % Cause last line, which could consist of page numbers on their own
+      % if the list of page numbers is long, to be aligned to the right.
+      \parfillskip=0pt plus -1fill
+      %
+      \hangindent=1em
+      %
+      \advance\rightskip by \entryrightmargin
+      % Determine how far we can stretch into the margin.
+      % This allows, e.g., "Appendix H  GNU Free Documentation License" to
+      % fit on one line in @letterpaper format.
+      \ifdim\entryrightmargin>2.1em
+        \dimen@i=2.1em
+      \else
+        \dimen@i=0em
+      \fi
+      \advance \parfillskip by 0pt minus 1\dimen@i
+      %
+      \dimen@ii = \hsize
+      \advance\dimen@ii by -1\leftskip
+      \advance\dimen@ii by -1\entryrightmargin
+      \advance\dimen@ii by 1\dimen@i
+      \ifdim\wd\boxA > \dimen@ii % If the entry doesn't fit in one line
+      \ifdim\dimen@ > 0.8\dimen@ii   % due to long index text
+        \dimen@ = 0.7\dimen@ % Try to split the text roughly evenly
+        \dimen@ii = \hsize
+        \advance \dimen@ii by -1em
+        \ifnum\dimen@>\dimen@ii
+          % If the entry is too long, use the whole line
+          \dimen@ = \dimen@ii
+        \fi
+        \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill % ragged right
+        \advance \dimen@ by 1\rightskip
+        \parshape = 2 0pt \dimen@ 1em \dimen@ii
+        % Ideally we'd add a finite glue at the end of the first line only, but
+        % TeX doesn't seem to provide a way to do such a thing.
+      \fi\fi
+      \unhbox\boxA
+      %
+      % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
+      \finalhyphendemerits = 0
+      %
+      % Word spacing - no stretch
+      \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font minus \fontdimen4\font
+      %
+      \linepenalty=1000  % Discourage line breaks.
+      \hyphenpenalty=5000  % Discourage hyphenation.
+      %
+      \par % format the paragraph
+    \egroup % The \vbox
+    \fi
   \endgroup
+  % delay text of entry until after penalty
+  \bgroup\aftergroup\insertindexentrybox
+  \entryorphanpenalty
+}}
+
+\newskip\thinshrinkable
+\skip\thinshrinkable=.15em minus .15em
+
+\newbox\entryindexbox
+\def\insertindexentrybox{%
+  \copy\entryindexbox
+  % The following gets the depth of the last box.  This is for even
+  % line spacing when entries span several lines.
+  \setbox\dummybox\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\entryindexbox
+    \nointerlineskip
+    \lastbox
+    \global\entrylinedepth=\prevdepth
+  }%
+  % Note that we couldn't simply \unvbox\entryindexbox followed by 
+  % \nointerlineskip\lastbox to remove the last box and then reinstate it, 
+  % because this resets how far the box has been \moveleft'ed to 0.  \unvbox
+  % doesn't affect \prevdepth either.
 }
+\newdimen\entrylinedepth
 
+% Default is no penalty
+\let\entryorphanpenalty\egroup
+
+% Used from \printindex.  \firsttoken should be the first token
+% after the \entry.  If it's not another \entry, we are at the last
+% line of a group of index entries, so insert a penalty to discourage
+% orphaned index entries.
+\long\def\indexorphanpenalty{%
+  \def\isentry{\entry}%
+  \ifx\firsttoken\isentry
+  \else
+    \unskip\penalty 9000
+    % The \unskip here stops breaking before the glue.  It relies on the
+    % \vskip above being there, otherwise there is an error
+    % "You can't use `\unskip' in vertical mode".  There has to be glue
+    % in the current vertical list that hasn't been added to the
+    % "current page".  See Chapter 24 of the TeXbook.  This contradicts
+    % Section 8.3.7 in "TeX by Topic," though.
+  \fi
+  \egroup % now comes the box added with \aftergroup
+}
+
 % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
+% The filll stretch here overpowers both the fil and fill stretch to push
+% the page number to the right.
 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
-  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
+  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1filll}
 
+
 \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
 
 \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
@@ -4796,12 +5435,39 @@ end
 % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
 % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
 % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
-\catcode`\@=11
+\catcode`\@=11  % private names
 
 \newbox\partialpage
 \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
+\newdimen\doublecolumntopgap
+\doublecolumntopgap = 0pt
 
+% Use inside an output routine to save \topmark and \firstmark
+\def\savemarks{%
+  \global\savedtopmark=\expandafter{\topmark }%
+  \global\savedfirstmark=\expandafter{\firstmark }%
+}
+\newtoks\savedtopmark
+\newtoks\savedfirstmark
+
+% Set \topmark and \firstmark for next time \output runs.
+% Can't be run from withinside \output (because any material
+% added while an output routine is active, including 
+% penalties, is saved for after it finishes).  The page so far
+% should be empty, otherwise what's on it will be thrown away.
+\def\restoremarks{%
+  \mark{\the\savedtopmark}%
+  \bgroup\output = {%
+    \setbox\dummybox=\box\PAGE
+  }abc\eject\egroup
+  % "abc" because output routine doesn't fire for a completely empty page.
+  \mark{\the\savedfirstmark}%
+}
+
 \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
+  % If not much space left on page, start a new page.
+  \ifdim\pagetotal>0.8\vsize\vfill\eject\fi
+  %
   % Grab any single-column material above us.
   \output = {%
     %
@@ -4821,9 +5487,16 @@ end
       \unvbox\PAGE
       \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
     }%
+    \savemarks
   }%
   \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
+  \restoremarks
   %
+  % We recover the two marks that the last output routine saved in order
+  % to propagate the information in marks added around a chapter heading,
+  % which could be otherwise be lost by the time the final page is output.
+  %
+  %
   % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
   \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
   %
@@ -4850,13 +5523,19 @@ end
   %
   % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
   % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
+  \global\doublecolumntopgap = \topskip
+  \global\advance\doublecolumntopgap by -1\baselineskip
+  \advance\vsize by -1\doublecolumntopgap
   \vsize = 2\vsize
+  \topskip=0pt
+  \global\entrylinedepth=0pt\relax
 }
 
 % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
-% the last.
+% the last, which is done by \balancecolumns.
 %
 \def\doublecolumnout{%
+  %
   \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
   % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
   % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
@@ -4879,10 +5558,13 @@ end
   %
   \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
   \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
-  \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
+  \vbox{%
+    \vskip\doublecolumntopgap
+    \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}}%
 }
-%
-% All done with double columns.
+
+
+% Finished with with double columns.
 \def\enddoublecolumns{%
   % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
   % _before_ we change the output routine.  This is necessary in the
@@ -4913,21 +5595,21 @@ end
   \penalty0
   %
   \output = {%
-    % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
-    % current page, no automatic page break.
+    % Split the last of the double-column material.
+    \savemarks
     \balancecolumns
     %
-    % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
-    % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
-    % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
+    % Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
     % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
-    % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
-    % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
-    % the output somewhat more palatable.)
+    % definition right away.
     \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
   }%
   \eject
   \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
+  \restoremarks
+  % Leave the double-column material on the current page, no automatic
+  % page break.
+  \box\balancedcolumns
   %
   % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
   % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
@@ -4935,31 +5617,52 @@ end
   % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
   \pagegoal = \vsize
 }
+\newbox\balancedcolumns
+\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{shouldnt see this}%
 %
-% Called at the end of the double column material.
+% Only called for the last of the double column material.  \doublecolumnout 
+% does the others.
 \def\balancecolumns{%
   \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
   \dimen@ = \ht0
   \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
   \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
-  \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
-  %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
-  \splittopskip = \topskip
-  % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
-  {%
-    \vbadness = 10000
-    \loop
-      \global\setbox3 = \copy0
-      \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
-    \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
-      \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
-    \repeat
-  }%
-  %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
-  \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
-  \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
+  \ifdim\dimen@<14\baselineskip
+    % Don't split a short final column in two.
+    \setbox2=\vbox{}%
+  \else
+    \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
+    \dimen@ii = \dimen@
+    \splittopskip = \topskip
+    % Loop until the second column is no higher than the first
+    {%
+      \vbadness = 10000
+      \loop
+        \global\setbox3 = \copy0
+        \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
+        % Remove glue from bottom of first column to
+        % make sure it is higher than the second.
+        \global\setbox1 = \vbox{\unvbox1\unpenalty\unskip}%
+      \ifdim\ht3>\ht1
+        \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
+      \repeat
+    }%
+    \multiply\dimen@ii by 4
+    \divide\dimen@ii by 5
+    \ifdim\ht3<\dimen@ii
+      % Column heights are too different, so don't make their bottoms
+      % flush with each other.  The glue at the end of the second column
+      % allows a second column to stretch, reducing the difference in
+      % height between the two.
+      \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1\vfill}%
+      \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3\vskip 0pt plus 0.3\ht0}%
+    \else
+      \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
+      \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
   %
-  \pagesofar
+  \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}%
 }
 \catcode`\@ = \other
 
@@ -4967,7 +5670,26 @@ end
 \message{sectioning,}
 % Chapters, sections, etc.
 
-% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course.  But we count the unnumbered
+% Let's start with @part.
+\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}}
+\def\partzzz#1{%
+  \chapoddpage
+  \null
+  \vskip.3\vsize  % move it down on the page a bit
+  \begingroup
+    \noindent \titlefonts\rmisbold #1\par % the text
+    \let\lastnode=\empty      % no node to associate with
+    \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc
+    \headingsoff              % no headline or footline on the part page
+    % This outputs a mark at the end of the page that clears \thischapter
+    % and \thissection, as is done in \startcontents.
+    \let\pchapsepmacro\relax
+    \chapmacro{}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
+    \chapoddpage
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron.  But we count the unnumbered
 % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
 % outlines by their "section number".  We avoid collisions with chapter
 % numbers by starting them at 10000.  (If a document ever has 10000
@@ -5046,8 +5768,8 @@ end
 \chardef\maxseclevel = 3
 %
 % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
-% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
-\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
+% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
+\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel
 %
 % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
 % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
@@ -5072,8 +5794,8 @@ end
   % The heading type:
   \def\headtype{#1}%
   \if \headtype U%
-    \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
-      \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
+    \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel
+      \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel
     \fi
   \else
     % Check for appendix sections:
@@ -5085,10 +5807,10 @@ end
       \fi\fi
     \fi
     % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
-    \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
+    \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel
       \def\headtype{U}%
     \else
-      \chardef\unmlevel = 3
+      \chardef\unnlevel = 3
     \fi
   \fi
   % Now print the heading:
@@ -5174,7 +5896,8 @@ end
   \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
 }
 
-\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
+% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}}
 \def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
   \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
     \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
@@ -5206,9 +5929,6 @@ end
 
 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
 \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
-  % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
-  % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
-  % Thus we are safer this way:		--kasal, 24feb04
   \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
   \unnmhead0{#1}%
   \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
@@ -5218,40 +5938,47 @@ end
 \let\top\unnumbered
 
 % Sections.
+% 
 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
 \def\seczzz#1{%
   \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
   \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
 }
 
-\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
+% normally calls appendixsectionzzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}}
 \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
   \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
   \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
 }
 \let\appendixsec\appendixsection
 
-\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
+% normally calls unnumberedseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}}
 \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
   \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
   \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
 }
 
 % Subsections.
-\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
+% 
+% normally calls numberedsubseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}}
 \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
   \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
   \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
 }
 
-\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
+% normally calls appendixsubseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}}
 \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
   \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
   \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
                  {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
 }
 
-\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
+% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}}
 \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
   \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
   \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
@@ -5259,21 +5986,25 @@ end
 }
 
 % Subsubsections.
-\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
+% 
+% normally numberedsubsubseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}}
 \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
   \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
   \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
                  {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
 }
 
-\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
+% normally appendixsubsubseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}}
 \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
   \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
   \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
                  {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
 }
 
-\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
+% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}}
 \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
   \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
   \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
@@ -5289,14 +6020,6 @@ end
 
 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
 
-% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
-%       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
-%          overlong headings to fold.
-%       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
-%          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
-%       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
-%          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
-
 \def\majorheading{%
   {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
   \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
@@ -5304,10 +6027,8 @@ end
 
 \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
 \def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
-  {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
-                    \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright
-                    \rmisbold #1\hfill}}%
-  \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
+  \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
+  \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
   \suppressfirstparagraphindent
 }
 
@@ -5323,16 +6044,19 @@ end
 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
 % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
 
-%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
+% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
 
-%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
-
 \newskip\chapheadingskip
 
+% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it.
 \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
+
+% Start a new page
 \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
+
+% \chapoddpage - start on an odd page for a new chapter
 % Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
 % get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong.  But we don't
 % care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
@@ -5340,9 +6064,8 @@ end
   \chappager
   \ifodd\pageno \else
     \begingroup
-      \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
-      \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
-      \hbox to 0pt{}%
+      \headingsoff
+      \null
       \chappager
     \endgroup
   \fi
@@ -5369,17 +6092,26 @@ end
 
 \CHAPPAGon
 
-% Chapter opening.
+% \chapmacro - Chapter opening.
 %
 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
 % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
+% Not used for @heading series.
 %
 % To test against our argument.
 \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
-\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
 \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
+\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
 %
 \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\thisenv\titlepage\else
+    \checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment.
+  \fi
+  % FIXME: \chapmacro is currently called from inside \titlepage when
+  % \setcontentsaftertitlepage to print the "Table of Contents" heading, but
+  % this should probably be done by \sectionheading with an option to print
+  % in chapter size.
+  %
   % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
   \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
   \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
@@ -5432,6 +6164,7 @@ end
   %
   {%
     \chapfonts \rmisbold
+    \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading % give better error message
     %
     % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
     % xref code eventually uses it.  On the other hand, it has to be called
@@ -5468,8 +6201,7 @@ end
     %
     % Typeset the actual heading.
     \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
-    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
-          \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
+    \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
           \unhbox0 #1\par}%
   }%
   \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
@@ -5491,18 +6223,18 @@ end
 \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
 %
 \def\unnchfopen #1{%
-\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
-                       \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright
-                       \rmisbold #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+  \chapoddpage
+  \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
+  \nobreak\bigskip\nobreak
 }
 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
 \par\penalty 5000 %
 }
 \def\centerchfopen #1{%
-\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
-                       \parindent=0pt
-                       \hfill {\rmisbold #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+  \chapoddpage
+  \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings \hfill #1\hfill}%
+  \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
 }
 \def\CHAPFopen{%
   \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
@@ -5526,20 +6258,29 @@ end
 
 % Print any size, any type, section title.
 %
-% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
-% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
-% section number.
+% #1 is the text of the title,
+% #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec),
+% #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc),
+% #4 is the section number.
 %
 \def\seckeyword{sec}
 %
 \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
   {%
-    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
-    \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold
-    %
     \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
     \def\temptype{#3}%
     %
+    % It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an
+    % environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is
+    % dubious), but not the others.
+    \ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else
+      \checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment.
+    \fi
+    \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading
+    %
+    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
+    \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold
+    %
     % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
     \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
     \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
@@ -5591,7 +6332,7 @@ end
     %
     % Now the second mark, after the heading break.  No break points
     % between here and the heading.
-    \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
+    \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
     \domark
     %
     % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
@@ -5645,15 +6386,15 @@ end
   %
   % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
   % glue accumulate.  (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
-  % discardable item.)
+  % discardable item.)  However, when a paragraph is not started next
+  % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out
+  % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically
+  % obscuring the section heading with something else.
   \vskip-\parskip
   %
-  % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
-  % 10000.  This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
-  % section headings.  Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
-  %
-  %   @section sec-whatever
-  %   @deffn def-whatever
+  % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known
+  % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation
+  % and do the needful.
   \penalty 10001
 }
 
@@ -5751,7 +6492,7 @@ end
   \savepageno = \pageno
   \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
     \raggedbottom              % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
-    \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+    \entryrightmargin=\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
     %
     % Roman numerals for page numbers.
     \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
@@ -5785,6 +6526,7 @@ end
 \def\summarycontents{%
   \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
     %
+    \let\partentry = \shortpartentry
     \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
     \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
     \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
@@ -5840,9 +6582,22 @@ end
 % The last argument is the page number.
 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
 
+% Parts, in the main contents.  Replace the part number, which doesn't
+% exist, with an empty box.  Let's hope all the numbers have the same width.
+% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed.
+\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}}
+\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}}
+%
+% Parts, in the short toc.
+\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{%
+  \penalty-300
+  \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip
+  \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}%
+}
+
 % Chapters, in the main contents.
 \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
-%
+
 % Chapters, in the short toc.
 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
 \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
@@ -5857,7 +6612,7 @@ end
   \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
   \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
 %
-\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\hskip.7em#1}{#4}}
 
 % Unnumbered chapters.
 \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
@@ -5890,6 +6645,8 @@ end
 \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
    \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
    \begingroup
+     % Move the page numbers slightly to the right
+     \advance\entryrightmargin by -0.05em
      \chapentryfonts
      \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
    \endgroup
@@ -5929,9 +6686,9 @@ end
 \message{environments,}
 % @foo ... @end foo.
 
-% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
+% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw TeX temporarily.
 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
-% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
+% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character.
 
 \envdef\tex{%
   \setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
@@ -5944,10 +6701,15 @@ end
   \catcode `\|=\other
   \catcode `\<=\other
   \catcode `\>=\other
-  \catcode`\`=\other
-  \catcode`\'=\other
+  \catcode `\`=\other
+  \catcode `\'=\other
   \escapechar=`\\
   %
+  % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000).  So reset it, and all our
+  % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions.
+  \mathactive
+  %
+  % Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file.
   \let\b=\ptexb
   \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
   \let\c=\ptexc
@@ -5963,9 +6725,11 @@ end
   \let\+=\tabalign
   \let\}=\ptexrbrace
   \let\/=\ptexslash
+  \let\sp=\ptexsp
   \let\*=\ptexstar
+  %\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode
   \let\t=\ptext
-  \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop  % outer
+  \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop  % we've made it outer
   \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
   %
   \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
@@ -6002,6 +6766,24 @@ end
     \endgraf
     \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
       \removelastskip
+      \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
+        % Penalize breaking before the environment, because preceding text
+        % often leads into it.
+        \penalty100
+      \fi
+      \vskip\envskipamount
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}}
+
+\def\afterenvbreak{{%
+  % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
+  % \sectionheading, q.v.
+  \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
+    \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
+    \endgraf
+    \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
+      \removelastskip
       % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
       % or better ...
       \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
@@ -6010,8 +6792,6 @@ end
   \fi
 }}
 
-\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
-
 % \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
 % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
 \let\nonarrowing=\relax
@@ -6049,9 +6829,13 @@ end
 				% side, and for 6pt waste from
 				% each corner char, and rule thickness
   \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
-  % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
-  \let\nonarrowing = t%
-  \vbox\bgroup
+  %
+  % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the
+  % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can
+  % collide with the section heading.
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi
+  %
+  \setbox\groupbox=\vbox\bgroup
       \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
       \carttop
       \hbox\bgroup
@@ -6064,7 +6848,7 @@ end
 	      \lineskip=\normlskip
 	      \parskip=\normpskip
 	      \vskip -\parskip
-	      \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
+	      \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group.
 }
 \def\Ecartouche{%
               \ifhmode\par\fi
@@ -6075,6 +6859,7 @@ end
       \egroup
       \cartbot
   \egroup
+  \addgroupbox
   \checkinserts
 }
 
@@ -6084,7 +6869,7 @@ end
 \newdimen\nonfillparindent
 \def\nonfillstart{%
   \aboveenvbreak
-  \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
+  \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy
   \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
   \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
   \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
@@ -6150,41 +6935,42 @@ end
 }
 
 % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
-% Let's do it by one command:
-\def\makedispenv #1#2{
-  \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
-  \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
+% Let's do it in one command.  #1 is the env name, #2 the definition.
+\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}%
+  \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}%
   \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
   \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
 }
 
-% Define two synonyms:
-\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
-  \makedispenv{#1}{#3}
-  \makedispenv{#2}{#3}
+% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment.
+\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{%
+  \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}%
+  \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}%
 }
-
-% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
 %
+% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font;
+% @example: same as @lisp.
+%
 % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
 %
-\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
+\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{%
   \nonfillstart
   \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
   \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
-  \gobble       % eat return
+  \gobble % eat return
 }
 % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
 %
-\makedispenv {display}{%
+\makedispenvdef{display}{%
   \nonfillstart
   \gobble
 }
 
 % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
 %
-\makedispenv{format}{%
+\makedispenvdef{format}{%
   \let\nonarrowing = t%
   \nonfillstart
   \gobble
@@ -6203,16 +6989,20 @@ end
 \envdef\flushright{%
   \let\nonarrowing = t%
   \nonfillstart
-  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
+  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax
   \gobble
 }
 \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
 
 
 % @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
-% justification.  From plain.tex.
+% justification.  From plain.tex.  Don't stretch around special
+% characters in urls in this environment, since the stretch at the right
+% should be enough.
 \envdef\raggedright{%
-  \rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
+  \rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
+  \def\urefprestretchamount{0pt}%
+  \def\urefpoststretchamount{0pt}%
 }
 \let\Eraggedright\par
 
@@ -6238,43 +7028,28 @@ end
 % we're doing normal filling.  So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
 % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
 %
+\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart}
+%
 \def\quotationstart{%
-  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
-  \parindent=0pt
-  %
-  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
+  \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too.
   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
-    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
     \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
-    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
-  \else
-    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
   \fi
   \parsearg\quotationlabel
 }
 
-\envdef\quotation{%
-  \setnormaldispenv
-  \quotationstart
-}
-
-\envdef\smallquotation{%
-  \setsmalldispenv
-  \quotationstart
-}
-\let\Esmallquotation = \Equotation
-
 % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
 % doing normal filling.
 %
 \def\Equotation{%
   \par
-  \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
+  \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else
     % indent a bit.
     \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
   \fi
   {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
 }
+\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation}
 
 % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
 \def\quotationlabel#1{%
@@ -6284,7 +7059,33 @@ end
   \fi
 }
 
+% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and
+% has no optional argument.
+% 
+\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart}
+%
+\def\indentedblockstart{%
+  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
+  \parindent=0pt
+  %
+  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
+  \else
+    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
+  \fi
+}
 
+% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling.
+%
+\def\Eindentedblock{%
+  \par
+  {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
+}
+\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock}
+
+
 % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
 % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
 % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
@@ -6331,21 +7132,28 @@ end
 
 % Setup for the @verbatim environment
 %
-% Real tab expansion
+% Real tab expansion.
 \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
 %
-\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
+% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle
+% tabs.  The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent,
+% or some other command that starts with a begin-group.  Otherwise, the
+% entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before
+% it is typeset.  Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands
+% (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself.
+\newbox\verbbox
+\def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup}
 %
 \begingroup
   \catcode`\^^I=\active
   \gdef\tabexpand{%
     \catcode`\^^I=\active
     \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
-      \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
-      \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
-      \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
-      \advance\dimen0 by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw
-      \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
+      \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab
+      \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw
+      \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
+      \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw
+      \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox
     }%
   }
 \endgroup
@@ -6354,15 +7162,16 @@ end
 \def\setupverbatim{%
   \let\nonarrowing = t%
   \nonfillstart
-  % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
-  \tt
-  \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
+  \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
+  % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines.  Otherwise, we would
+  % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode.
+  \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}%
   \tabexpand
   \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
   % Respect line breaks,
   % print special symbols as themselves, and
-  % make each space count
-  % must do in this order:
+  % make each space count.
+  % Must do in this order:
   \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
   \everypar{\starttabbox}%
 }
@@ -6419,6 +7228,7 @@ end
     \makevalueexpandable
     \setupverbatim
     \indexnofonts       % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
+    \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}%
     \input #1
     \afterenvbreak
   }%
@@ -6432,7 +7242,7 @@ end
 % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
 % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
 % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
-% possible is very desirable.
+% possible is desirable.
 %
 \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
 \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
@@ -6468,7 +7278,7 @@ end
     % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
     % a break between a section heading and a defun.
     %
-    % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
+    % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
     % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
     % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
     % @def command.
@@ -6505,7 +7315,7 @@ end
     #1#2 \endheader
     % common ending:
     \interlinepenalty = 10000
-    \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+    \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax
     \endgraf
     \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
     \penalty\defunpenalty  % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
@@ -6527,7 +7337,7 @@ end
   \temp
 }
 
-% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
+% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader { (defn. of \deffnheader) }
 %
 % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
 % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
@@ -6535,14 +7345,37 @@ end
 \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
   \envdef#1{%
     \startdefun
+    \doingtypefnfalse    % distinguish typed functions from all else
     \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
   }%
   \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
   \def#3%
 }
 
-%%% Untyped functions:
+\newif\ifdoingtypefn       % doing typed function?
+\newif\ifrettypeownline    % typeset return type on its own line?
 
+% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions
+% are printed on their own line.  This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun,
+% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod.
+% 
+\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\onword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
+      = \empty
+  \else\ifx\temp\offword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
+      = \relax
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp',
+                must be on|off}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% Untyped functions:
+
 % @deffn category name args
 \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
 
@@ -6560,7 +7393,7 @@ end
   \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
 }
 
-%%% Typed functions:
+% Typed functions:
 
 % @deftypefn category type name args
 \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
@@ -6575,10 +7408,11 @@ end
 %
 \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
+  \doingtypefntrue
   \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
 }
 
-%%% Typed variables:
+% Typed variables:
 
 % @deftypevr category type var args
 \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
@@ -6596,7 +7430,7 @@ end
   \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
 }
 
-%%% Untyped variables:
+% Untyped variables:
 
 % @defvr category var args
 \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
@@ -6607,7 +7441,8 @@ end
 % \defcvof {category of}class var args
 \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
 
-%%% Type:
+% Types:
+
 % @deftp category name args
 \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
   \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
@@ -6635,25 +7470,49 @@ end
 % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
 %
 \def\defname#1#2#3{%
+  \par
   % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
   \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
   %
-  % How we'll format the type name.  Putting it in brackets helps
+  % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function
+  % on a line by itself.
+  \rettypeownlinefalse
+  \ifdoingtypefn  % doing a typed function specifically?
+    % then check user option for putting return type on its own line:
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else
+      \rettypeownlinetrue
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  %
+  % How we'll format the category name.  Putting it in brackets helps
   % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
   % just below it.
   \def\temp{#1}%
   \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
   %
-  % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
+  % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.  We'll always have at
+  % least two.
+  \tempnum = 2
+  %
   % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
   % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
   \dimen0=\hsize  \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0  \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
+  %
+  % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line.
+  \ifrettypeownline
+    \advance\tempnum by 1
+    \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}%
+  \else
+    \def\maybeshapeline{}%
+  \fi
+  %
   % The continuations:
   \dimen2=\hsize  \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
-  % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
-  \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
   %
-  % Put the type name to the right margin.
+  % The final paragraph shape:
+  \parshape \tempnum  0in \dimen0  \maybeshapeline  \defargsindent \dimen2
+  %
+  % Put the category name at the right margin.
   \noindent
   \hbox to 0pt{%
     \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
@@ -6675,8 +7534,16 @@ end
     % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
     %   one has made identifiers using them :).
     \df \tt
-    \def\temp{#2}% return value type
-    \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
+    \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type
+    \ifx\temp\empty\else
+      \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type
+      \ifrettypeownline
+        % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following:
+        \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break  
+      \else
+        \space  % type on same line, so just followed by a space
+      \fi
+    \fi           % no return type
     #3% output function name
   }%
   {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
@@ -6696,7 +7563,10 @@ end
   \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
   %
   % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
-  % want a way to get ttsl.  Let's try @var for that.
+  % want a way to get ttsl.  We used to recommend @var for that, so
+  % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter.
+  % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen
+  % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny.  @code also disables ?` !`.
   \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
   #1%
   \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
@@ -6794,7 +7664,7 @@ end
 
 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
-\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
+\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
   \newwrite\macscribble
   \def\scantokens#1{%
     \toks0={#1}%
@@ -6805,29 +7675,43 @@ end
   }
 \fi
 
+\let\aftermacroxxx\relax
+\def\aftermacro{\aftermacroxxx}
+
+% alias because \c means cedilla in @tex or @math
+\let\texinfoc=\c
+
+% Used at the time of macro expansion.
+% Argument is macro body with arguments substituted
 \def\scanmacro#1{%
-  \begingroup
-    \newlinechar`\^^M
-    \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
-    % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
-    % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
-    % backslash to get it printed correctly.  Previously, we had
-    % \catcode`\\=\other instead.  We'll see whether a problem appears
-    % with macro expansion.				--kasal, 19aug04
-    \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
-    % ... and \example
-    \spaceisspace
-    %
-    % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
-    % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
-    %							--kasal, 29nov03
-    \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
-  \endgroup
+  \newlinechar`\^^M
+  \def\xprocessmacroarg{\eatspaces}%
+  %
+  % Process the macro body under the current catcode regime.
+  \scantokens{#1\texinfoc}\aftermacro%
+  %
+  % The \c is to remove the \newlinechar added by \scantokens, and
+  % can be noticed by \parsearg.
+  %   The \aftermacro allows a \comment at the end of the macro definition
+  % to duplicate itself past the final \newlinechar added by \scantokens:
+  % this is used in the definition of \group to comment out a newline.  We
+  % don't do the same for \c to support Texinfo files with macros that ended
+  % with a @c, which should no longer be necessary.
+  %   We avoid surrounding the call to \scantokens with \bgroup and \egroup
+  % to allow macros to open or close groups themselves.
 }
 
+% Used for copying and captions
 \def\scanexp#1{%
+  \bgroup
+  % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \printindex
+  % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
+  % backslash to get it printed correctly.
+  % FIXME: This may not be needed.
+  %\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
   \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
   \temp
+  \egroup
 }
 
 \newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
@@ -6877,22 +7761,22 @@ end
 
 % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
 % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
-% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
-
+% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \
+% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash.
+%
 % Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
 % them to avoid their expansion.  Must do this non-globally, to
 % confine the change to the current group.
-
+%
 % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
-% done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
+% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
-
-\def\scanctxt{%
+%
+\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine
   \catcode`\"=\other
   \catcode`\+=\other
   \catcode`\<=\other
   \catcode`\>=\other
-  \catcode`\@=\other
   \catcode`\^=\other
   \catcode`\_=\other
   \catcode`\|=\other
@@ -6900,46 +7784,68 @@ end
   \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi
 }
 
-\def\scanargctxt{%
+\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros.
   \scanctxt
+  \catcode`\@=\other
   \catcode`\\=\other
   \catcode`\^^M=\other
 }
 
-\def\macrobodyctxt{%
+\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions
   \scanctxt
+  \catcode`\ =\other
+  \catcode`\@=\other
   \catcode`\{=\other
   \catcode`\}=\other
   \catcode`\^^M=\other
   \usembodybackslash
 }
 
+% Used when scanning braced macro arguments.  Note, however, that catcode
+% changes here are ineffectual if the macro invocation was nested inside
+% an argument to another Texinfo command.
 \def\macroargctxt{%
   \scanctxt
-  \catcode`\\=\other
+  \catcode`\ =\active
+  \catcode`\^^M=\other
+  \catcode`\\=\active
 }
 
+\def\macrolineargctxt{% used for whole-line arguments without braces
+  \scanctxt
+  \catcode`\{=\other
+  \catcode`\}=\other
+}
+
 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
 % where N is the macro parameter number.
 % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
 % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
-
+%
 {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
  @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
  @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
 }
 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
 
+\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 }
+
 \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
 \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
 
 \def\macroxxx#1{%
-  \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
+  \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
   \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
-     \paramno=0%
+     \paramno=0\relax
   \else
      \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
+     \if\paramno>256\relax
+       \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
+         \errhelp = \EMsimple
+         \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments}
+       \fi
+     \fi
   \fi
   \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
      \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
@@ -6981,125 +7887,513 @@ end
   \fi
 }
 
-% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
-% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
-% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
+% \getargs -- Parse the arguments to a @macro line.  Set \macname to
+% the name of the macro, and \argl to the braced argument list.
 \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
 \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
-\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
+\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
 \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
+% This made use of the feature that if the last token of a
+% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
+% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
 
-% Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
-% so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
-% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
+% Parse the optional {params} list to @macro or @rmacro.
+% Set \paramno to the number of arguments,
+% and \paramlist to a parameter text for the macro (e.g. #1,#2,#3 for a
+% three-param macro.)  Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH in the params
+% list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded.  If there are
+% less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N
+% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be
+% defined `a la TeX in the macro body.  
+%
 % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
-
-% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
-% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
-% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
-% it to # just before using the token list produced.
 %
-% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
-% the macro is used.
-
-\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
-        \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
+% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used: see
+% \parsemmanyargdef.
+%
+\def\parsemargdef#1;{%
+  \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
+  \let\hash\relax
+  % \hash is redefined to `#' later to get it into definitions
+  \let\processmacroarg\relax
+  \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,%
+  \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else
+    \paramno0\relax
+    \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments
+  \fi
+}
 \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
   \if#1;\let\next=\relax
   \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
-    \advance\paramno by 1%
+    \advance\paramno by 1
     \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
-        {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
+        {\processmacroarg{\hash\the\paramno}}%
     \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
   \fi\next}
 
-% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
-% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
+% \parsemacbody, \parsermacbody
+%
+% Read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. (They're different since
+% rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
+% 
+% We are in \macrobodyctxt, and the \xdef causes backslashshes in the macro 
+% body to be transformed.
+% Set \macrobody to the body of the macro, and call \defmacro.
+%
+{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsemacbody#1@end macro{%
+\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}%
+{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro{%
+\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}%
 
-\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
-{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
-\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
-{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+% Make @ a letter, so that we can make private-to-Texinfo macro names.
+\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@}
+\catcode `@=11\relax
 
-% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
-% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
-% Much magic with \expandafter here.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Code for > 10 arguments only   %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the
+% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is
+% processed again to replace the arguments.
+%
+% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the
+% argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of
+% the catcode regime under which the body was input).
+%
+% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more
+% arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error).
+%
+% In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments
+% list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to
+% each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list
+% in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments
+% are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining
+% twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power.
+\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{%
+  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
+  \else 
+    \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@
+    \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}%
+    \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa
+       \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}%
+    % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we
+    % don't want \the  to be expanded in the \parsermacbody  as it uses an
+    % \xdef .
+    \expandafter\edef\tempa
+      {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}%
+    \advance\paramno by 1\relax
+  \fi\next}
+
+
+\let\endargs@\relax
+\let\nil@\relax
+\def\nilm@{\nil@}%
+\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}%
+
+% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its
+% definition.  It gets all the arguments' values and assigns them to macros
+% macarg.ARGNAME
+%
+% #1 is the macro name
+% #2 is the list of argument names
+% #3 is the list of argument values
+\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{%
+  \def\macargdeflist@{}%
+  \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion.
+  \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}%
+  \def\macroname{#1}%
+  \begingroup
+  \macroargctxt
+  \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}%
+  \def\@tempa{#3}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\empty
+    \setemptyargvalues@
+  \else
+    \getargvals@@
+  \fi
+}
+\def\getargvals@@{%
+  \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
+      % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty.
+      \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
+      \else
+        \errhelp = \EMsimple
+        \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}%
+      \fi
+      \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
+  \else
+    \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
+       % No more arguments values passed to macro.  Set remaining named-arg
+       % macros to empty.
+       \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
+    \else
+      % pop current arg name into \@tempb
+      \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}%
+      \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}%
+       % pop current argument value into \@tempc
+      \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}%
+      \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}%
+       % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value.
+       % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd
+       \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}%
+       \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax
+       \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{%
+         \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}%
+       \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}%
+       \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@
+       \let\next\getargvals@@
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \next
+}
+
+\def\push@#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def
+  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2%
+  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+  \expandafter#1#2}%
+}
+
+% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result
+% in macro \@tempa.
+% 
+\def\macvalstoargs@{%
+  %  To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed
+  % within an \edef  expand only once. So we are going to place all argument
+  % values into respective token registers.
+  %
+  % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering.
+  \begingroup
+    \paramno0\relax
+    % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument
+    % value into a new token list register \toks#N
+    \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,%
+    % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their
+    % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they
+    % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef .
+    \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}%
+    % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers
+    % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after
+    % group.
+    \expandafter
+  \endgroup
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}%
+  }
+
+% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. 
+% 
+\def\macargexpandinbody@{% 
+  \expandafter
+  \endgroup
+  \macargdeflist@
+  % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result
+  % is in \@tempa .
+  \macvalstoargs@
+  % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value
+  % with \@tempb .
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname
+  % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing
+  % \egroup .
+  \ifx\@tempb\gobble
+     \let\@tempc\relax
+  \else
+     \let\@tempc\egroup
+  \fi
+  % And now we do the real job:
+  \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}%
+  \@tempd
+}
+
+\def\putargsintokens@#1,{%
+  \if#1;\let\next\relax
+  \else
+    \let\next\putargsintokens@
+    % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary
+    % alias \@tempb .
+    \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno
+    % Then we place the argument value into that token list register.
+    \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname
+    \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}%
+    \advance\paramno by 1\relax
+  \fi
+  \next
+}
+
+% Trailing missing arguments are set to empty.
+% 
+\def\setemptyargvalues@{%
+  \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
+    \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
+  \else
+    \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@
+    \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
+  \fi
+  \next
+}
+
+\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{%
+    \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}%
+  \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@
+  \def\paramlist{#2}%
+}
+
+% #1 is the element target macro
+% #2 is the list macro
+% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value
+\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
+   \def#1{#3}%
+   \def#2{#4}%
+}
+\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
+   \long\def#1{#3}%
+   \long\def#2{#4}%
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of code for > 10 arguments %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+
+% Remove following spaces at the expansion stage.
+% This works because spaces are discarded before each argument when TeX is 
+% getting the arguments for a macro.
+% This must not be immediately followed by a }.
+\long\def\gobblespaces#1{#1}
+
+% This defines a Texinfo @macro or @rmacro, called by \parsemacbody.
+%    \macrobody has the body of the macro in it, with placeholders for
+% its parameters, looking like "\processmacroarg{\hash 1}".
+%    \paramno is the number of parameters
+%    \paramlist is a TeX parameter text, e.g. "#1,#2,#3,"
+% There are eight cases: recursive and nonrecursive macros of zero, one,
+% up to nine, and many arguments.
 % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
-% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
+% they're defined in: @include reads the file inside a group.
+%
 \def\defmacro{%
   \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
-  \ifrecursive
+  \ifnum\paramno=1
+    \def\processmacroarg{\gobblespaces}%
+    % This removes the pair of braces around the argument.  We don't
+    % use \eatspaces, because this can cause ends of lines to be lost
+    % when the argument to \eatspaces is read, leading to line-based
+    % commands like "@itemize" not being read correctly.
+  \else
+    \def\processmacroarg{\xprocessmacroarg}%
+    \let\xprocessmacroarg\relax
+  \fi
+  \ifrecursive   %%%%%%%%%%%%%% Recursive %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     \ifcase\paramno
     % 0
       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
-        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
     \or % 1
       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
-         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \bgroup
          \noexpand\braceorline
-         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
-         \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
-    \else % many
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
-         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
-         \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
-          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
-      \expandafter\expandafter
-      \expandafter\xdef
-      \expandafter\expandafter
-        \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
-          \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{%
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname{%
+           \noexpand\gobblespaces##1\empty}%
+           % The \empty is for \gobblespaces in case #1 is empty
+         }%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname##1{%
+         \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
+    \else
+      \ifnum\paramno<10\relax % at most 9
+        % See non-recursive section below for comments
+        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+          \bgroup
+          \noexpand\expandafter
+          \noexpand\macroargctxt
+          \noexpand\expandafter
+          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname}%
+        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{%
+            \noexpand\passargtomacro
+            \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{##1,}}%
+        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{%
+            \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname ##1}%
+        \expandafter\expandafter
+        \expandafter\xdef
+        \expandafter\expandafter
+          \csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname\paramlist{%
+            \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
+      \else % 10 or more
+        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+          \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
+        }%    
+        \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\macrobody
+        \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble
+      \fi
     \fi
-  \else
+  \else  %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Non-recursive %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
     \ifcase\paramno
     % 0
       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
-        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
-        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
     \or % 1
       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
-         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \bgroup
          \noexpand\braceorline
-         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{%
+         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname{%
+           \noexpand\gobblespaces##1\empty}%
+           % The \empty is for \gobblespaces in case #1 is empty
+         }%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname##1{%
         \egroup
-        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
-        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
-    \else % many
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
-         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
-         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
-          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
-      \expandafter\expandafter
-      \expandafter\xdef
-      \expandafter\expandafter
-      \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
-      \paramlist{%
-          \egroup
-          \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
-          \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}%
+        }%
+    \else % at most 9
+      \ifnum\paramno<10\relax
+        % @MACNAME sets the context for reading the macro argument
+        % @MACNAME@@ gets the argument, processes backslashes and appends a 
+        % comma.
+        % @MACNAME@@@ removes braces surrounding the argument list.
+        % @MACNAME@@@@ scans the macro body with arguments substituted.
+        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+          \bgroup
+          \noexpand\expandafter  % This \expandafter skip any spaces after the
+          \noexpand\macroargctxt % macro before we change the catcode of space.
+          \noexpand\expandafter
+          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname}%
+        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{%
+            \noexpand\passargtomacro
+            \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{##1,}}%
+        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{%
+            \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname ##1}%
+        \expandafter\expandafter
+        \expandafter\xdef
+        \expandafter\expandafter
+          \csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname\paramlist{%
+            \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
+      \else % 10 or more:
+        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+          \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
+        }%
+        \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\macrobody
+        \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\norecurse
+      \fi
     \fi
   \fi}
 
+\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax % end private-to-Texinfo catcodes
+
 \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
 
-% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
-% {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
-% line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
-% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=13  % We need to manipulate \ so use @ as escape
+@catcode`@_=11  % private names
+@catcode`@!=11  % used as argument separator
+
+% \passargtomacro#1#2 -
+% Call #1 with a list of tokens #2, with any doubled backslashes in #2
+% compressed to one.
+%
+% This implementation works by expansion, and not execution (so we cannot use 
+% \def or similar).  This reduces the risk of this failing in contexts where 
+% complete expansion is done with no execution (for example, in writing out to 
+% an auxiliary file for an index entry).
+% 
+% State is kept in the input stream: the argument passed to
+% @look_ahead, @gobble_and_check_finish and @add_segment is
+%
+% THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT ! {PENDING_BS} NEXT_TOKEN  (... rest of input)
+%
+% where:
+% THE_MACRO - name of the macro we want to call
+% ARG_RESULT - argument list we build to pass to that macro
+% PENDING_BS - either a backslash or nothing
+% NEXT_TOKEN - used to look ahead in the input stream to see what's coming next
+
+@gdef@passargtomacro#1#2{%
+  @add_segment #1!{}@relax#2\@_finish\%
+}
+@gdef@_finish{@_finishx} @global@let@_finishx@relax
+
+% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
+% #2 - PENDING_BS
+% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN
+% #4 used to look ahead
+%
+% If the next token is not a backslash, process the rest of the argument; 
+% otherwise, remove the next token.
+@gdef@look_ahead#1!#2#3#4{%
+  @ifx#4\%
+   @expandafter@gobble_and_check_finish 
+  @else
+   @expandafter@add_segment
+  @fi#1!{#2}#4#4%
+}
+
+% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
+% #2 - PENDING_BS
+% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN
+% #4 should be a backslash, which is gobbled.
+% #5 looks ahead
+%
+% Double backslash found.  Add a single backslash, and look ahead.
+@gdef@gobble_and_check_finish#1!#2#3#4#5{%
+  @add_segment#1\!{}#5#5%
+}
+
+@gdef@is_fi{@fi}
+
+% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
+% #2 - PENDING_BS
+% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN
+% #4 is input stream until next backslash
+%
+% Input stream is either at the start of the argument, or just after a 
+% backslash sequence, either a lone backslash, or a doubled backslash.  
+% NEXT_TOKEN contains the first token in the input stream: if it is \finish, 
+% finish; otherwise, append to ARG_RESULT the segment of the argument up until
+% the next backslash.  PENDING_BACKSLASH contains a backslash to represent
+% a backslash just before the start of the input stream that has not been
+% added to ARG_RESULT.
+@gdef@add_segment#1!#2#3#4\{%
+@ifx#3@_finish
+  @call_the_macro#1!%
+@else
+  % append the pending backslash to the result, followed by the next segment
+  @expandafter@is_fi@look_ahead#1#2#4!{\}@fi
+  % this @fi is discarded by @look_ahead.
+  % we can't get rid of it with \expandafter because we don't know how 
+  % long #4 is.
+}
+
+% #1 - THE_MACRO
+% #2 - ARG_RESULT
+% #3 discards the res of the conditional in @add_segment, and @is_fi ends the 
+% conditional.
+@gdef@call_the_macro#1#2!#3@fi{@is_fi #1{#2}}
+
+}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% \braceorline MAC is used for a one-argument macro MAC.  It checks
+% whether the next non-whitespace character is a {.  It sets the context
+% for reading the argument (slightly different in the two cases).  Then,
+% to read the argument, in the whole-line case, it then calls the regular
+% \parsearg MAC; in the lbrace case, it calls \passargtomacro MAC.
+% 
 \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
 \def\braceorlinexxx{%
-  \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
-    \expandafter\parsearg
+  \ifx\nchar\bgroup
+    \macroargctxt
+    \expandafter\passargtomacro
+  \else
+    \macrolineargctxt\expandafter\parsearg
   \fi \macnamexxx}
 
 
 % @alias.
 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
-% sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
+% sign.  Make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
+%
 \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
 \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
@@ -7120,7 +8414,8 @@ end
 
 % @inforef is relatively simple.
 \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
-\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
+\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{%
+  \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
   node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
 
 % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
@@ -7173,6 +8468,7 @@ end
   \pdfmkdest{#1}%
   \iflinks
     {%
+      \requireauxfile
       \atdummies  % preserve commands, but don't expand them
       \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
 	\write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
@@ -7181,39 +8477,78 @@ end
       \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
       \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
       \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
-      \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout
+      \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout
     }%
   \fi
 }
 
+% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used
+% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified.
+% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title
+% variable, now it's official.
+% 
+\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\onword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
+      = \empty
+  \else\ifx\temp\offword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
+      = \relax
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp',
+                must be on|off}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% 
 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
 % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
 % manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
 %
-\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
-\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
-\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\pxref{\putwordsee{} \xrefXX}
+\def\xref{\putwordSee{} \xrefXX}
+\def\ref{\xrefXX}
+
+\def\xrefXX#1{\def\xrefXXarg{#1}\futurelet\tokenafterxref\xrefXXX}
+\def\xrefXXX{\expandafter\xrefX\expandafter[\xrefXXarg,,,,,,,]}
+%
+\newbox\toprefbox
+\newbox\printedrefnamebox
+\newbox\infofilenamebox
+\newbox\printedmanualbox
+%
 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
   \unsepspaces
-  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
+  %
+  % Get args without leading/trailing spaces.
   \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
-  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
-  \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
-  \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
+  \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
+  %
+  \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}%
+  \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}%
+  %
+  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
+  \setbox\printedmanualbox  = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
+  %
+  % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in
+  % the @xref, figure out what we want to use.
+  \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
     % No printed node name was explicitly given.
-    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
-      % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax
+      % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets.
       \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
     \else
-      % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
-      % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
-      \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
-        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
+      % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside
+      % the square brackets if we have it.
+      \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
+        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name.
         \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
       \else
         \ifhavexrefs
-          % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
+          % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values.
           \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
         \else
           % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
@@ -7227,13 +8562,20 @@ end
   \ifpdf
     {\indexnofonts
      \turnoffactive
+     \makevalueexpandable
      % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
-     % etc. don't get their TeX definitions.
+     % etc. don't get their TeX definitions.  This ignores all spaces in
+     % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename.
      \getfilename{#4}%
      %
-     % See comments at \activebackslashdouble.
-     {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
-      \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}%
+     % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing
+     % spaces in #1, which should be ignored.
+     \edef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
+     \ifx\pdfxrefdest\empty
+       \def\pdfxrefdest{Top}% no empty targets
+     \else
+       \txiescapepdf\pdfxrefdest  % escape PDF special chars
+     \fi
      %
      \leavevmode
      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
@@ -7245,10 +8587,6 @@ end
     }%
     \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
   \fi
-  %
-  % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
-  % instead of "[somenode], p.3".  We distinguish them by the
-  % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
   {%
     % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
     % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
@@ -7257,32 +8595,49 @@ end
     \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
       \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
   }%
+  %
+  % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
+  % instead of "[somenode], p.3".  \iffloat distinguishes them by
+  % \Xthisreftitle being set to a magic string.
   \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
     % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
     % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
-    \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
+    \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
       \refx{#1-snt}{}%
     \else
       \printedrefname
     \fi
     %
-    % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
+    % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
     % "in MANUALNAME".
-    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+    \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
       \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
     \fi
   \else
     % node/anchor (non-float) references.
+    % 
+    % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert
+    % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not
+    % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
+    % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens,
+    % this is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name
+    % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+    % 
+    \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
+      % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name.
+      % 
+      \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}%
     %
-    % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
-    % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
-    % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
-    % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
-    % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
-    % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
-    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
-      \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+    \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt
+      % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no
+      % printed manual name (arg 5).  This is essentially the same as
+      % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else.
+      % 
+      \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}%
+    %
     \else
+      % Reference within this manual.
+      %
       % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
       % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
       % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
@@ -7294,7 +8649,7 @@ end
        \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
        \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
       }%
-      % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
+      % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden.
       \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
       %
       % But we always want a comma and a space:
@@ -7302,11 +8657,46 @@ end
       %
       % output the `page 3'.
       \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
-    \fi
+      % Add a , if xref followed by a space
+      \if\space\noexpand\tokenafterxref ,%
+      \else\ifx\	\tokenafterxref ,% @TAB
+      \else\ifx\*\tokenafterxref ,%   @*
+      \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,%   @SPACE
+      \else\ifx\
+                \tokenafterxref ,%    @NL
+      \else\ifx\tie\tokenafterxref ,% @tie
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+    \fi\fi
   \fi
   \endlink
 \endgroup}
 
+% Output a cross-manual xref to #1.  Used just above (twice).
+% 
+% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither
+% missing or Top.  Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply
+% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual.
+% 
+% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the
+% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in
+% the input.  By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less
+% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g.,
+% in a monospaced font).  Hopefully it will never happen in practice.
+% 
+% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every
+% reference, since the current font is indeterminate.
+% 
+\def\crossmanualxref#1{%
+  \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}%
+  \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}%
+  \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp  % nonempty?
+    \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else  % same as Top?
+      \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  #1%
+}
+
 % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
 % output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
 % since square brackets don't work well in some documents.  Particularly
@@ -7346,6 +8736,7 @@ end
 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
 %
 \def\refx#1#2{%
+  \requireauxfile
   {%
     \indexnofonts
     \otherbackslash
@@ -7357,7 +8748,8 @@ end
     \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
     \iflinks
       \ifhavexrefs
-        \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
+        {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value
+         \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}%
       \else
         \ifwarnedxrefs\else
           \global\warnedxrefstrue
@@ -7408,6 +8800,23 @@ end
   \fi
 }
 
+% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
+% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
+% This is done with @novalidate at the beginning of the file.
+%
+\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
+\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
+
+% Used when writing to the aux file, or when using data from it.
+\def\requireauxfile{%
+  \iflinks
+    \tryauxfile
+    % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
+    \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
+  \fi
+  \global\let\requireauxfile=\relax   % Only do this once.
+}
+
 % Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
 %
 \def\tryauxfile{%
@@ -7487,14 +8896,7 @@ end
   \catcode`\\=\other
   %
   % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
-  {%
-    \count1=128
-    \def\loop{%
-      \catcode\count1=\other
-      \advance\count1 by 1
-      \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
-    }%
-  }%
+  {\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other}%
   %
   % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
   \catcode`\{=1
@@ -7521,15 +8923,13 @@ end
 % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
 \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
 
-% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
+% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only.
 \let\footnotestyle=\comment
 
 {\catcode `\@=11
 %
 % Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
 \gdef\footnote{%
-  \let\indent=\ptexindent
-  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
   \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
   \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
   %
@@ -7553,6 +8953,11 @@ end
 %
 \gdef\dofootnote{%
   \insert\footins\bgroup
+  %
+  % Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot
+  % more work.  (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.)
+  \let\footnote=\errfootnotenest
+  %
   % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
   % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
   % So reset some parameters.
@@ -7584,17 +8989,30 @@ end
   % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
   % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
   \footstrut
+  %
+  % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine.
   \futurelet\next\fo@t
 }
 }%end \catcode `\@=11
 
+\def\errfootnotenest{%
+  \errhelp=\EMsimple
+  \errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex,
+    even though they work in makeinfo; sorry}
+}
+
+\def\errfootnoteheading{%
+  \errhelp=\EMsimple
+  \errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported}
+}
+
 % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
 % the real \insert just after the vbox finished.  Otherwise, the insertion
 % would be lost.
 % Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
 % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
 % And the same can be done for other insert classes.  --kasal, 16nov03.
-
+%
 % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
 % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
 % out prematurely.
@@ -7671,7 +9089,7 @@ end
   it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
 %
 \def\image#1{%
-  \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
+  \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined
     \ifwarnednoepsf \else
       \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
       \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
@@ -7687,14 +9105,22 @@ end
 % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
 % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
 % #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
-% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
+% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff.
 \newif\ifimagevmode
 \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
   \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example
   \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names
+  \def\xprocessmacroarg{\eatspaces}% in case we are being used via a macro
   % If the image is by itself, center it.
   \ifvmode
     \imagevmodetrue
+  \else \ifx\centersub\centerV
+    % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space
+    \imagevmodetrue
+    \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev
+  \fi\fi
+  %
+  \ifimagevmode
     \nobreak\medskip
     % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
     % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
@@ -7704,21 +9130,37 @@ end
   \fi
   %
   % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
-  % environment such as @quotation is respected.  On the other hand, if
-  % it's at the top level, we don't want the normal paragraph indentation.
-  \noindent
+  %  environment such as @quotation is respected.
+  % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the
+  %  normal paragraph indentation.
+  % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't
+  %  want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and
+  %  eradicate the centering.
+  \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi
   %
   % Output the image.
   \ifpdf
+    % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX <= 0.80
     \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
   \else
-    % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
-    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
-    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
-    \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
+    \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
+      % For epsf.tex
+      % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+        \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+        \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
+      \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
+    \else
+      % For XeTeX
+      \doxeteximage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+    \fi
   \fi
   %
-  \ifimagevmode \medskip \fi  % space after the standalone image
+  \ifimagevmode
+    \medskip  % space after a standalone image
+  \fi  
+  \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi
 \endgroup}
 
 
@@ -7858,6 +9300,7 @@ end
       % \floatlabel-lof.  Besides \floatident, we include the short
       % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
       {%
+        \requireauxfile
         \atdummies
         %
         % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
@@ -7997,20 +9440,20 @@ end
 {
   \catcode`\_ = \active
   \globaldefs=1
-\parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup
-  \let_=\normalunderscore  % normal _ character for filenames
+\parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
   \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
     % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
+    \let_ = \normalunderscore  % normal _ character for filename test
     \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
     \ifeof 1
-      \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}%
+      \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish
     \else
       \globaldefs = 1  % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
       \input txi-#1.tex
     \fi
     \closein 1
   \endgroup % end raw TeX
-\endgroup}
+}
 %
 % If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
 % try txi-de.tex.
@@ -8058,6 +9501,45 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
 }
 
+% Get input by bytes instead of by UTF-8 codepoints for XeTeX and LuaTeX, 
+% otherwise the encoding support is completely broken.
+\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
+\else
+\XeTeXdefaultencoding "bytes"  % For subsequent files to be read
+\XeTeXinputencoding "bytes"  % Effective in texinfo.tex only
+% Unfortunately, there seems to be no corresponding XeTeX command for
+% output encoding.  This is a problem for auxiliary index and TOC files.
+% The only solution would be perhaps to write out @U{...} sequences in
+% place of UTF-8 characters.
+\fi
+
+\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
+\else
+\directlua{
+local utf8_char, byte, gsub = unicode.utf8.char, string.byte, string.gsub
+local function convert_char (char)
+  return utf8_char(byte(char))
+end
+
+local function convert_line (line)
+  return gsub(line, ".", convert_char)
+end
+
+callback.register("process_input_buffer", convert_line)
+
+local function convert_line_out (line)
+  local line_out = ""
+  for c in string.utfvalues(line) do
+     line_out = line_out .. string.char(c)
+  end
+  return line_out
+end
+
+callback.register("process_output_buffer", convert_line_out)
+}
+\fi
+
+
 % Helpers for encodings.
 % Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
 %
@@ -8080,7 +9562,16 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
 % @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
 % according to the specified encoding.
 %
-\parseargdef\documentencoding{%
+\def\documentencoding{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\documentencodingzzz}
+\def\documentencodingzzz#1{%
+  % Get input by bytes instead of by UTF-8 codepoints for XeTeX,
+  % otherwise the encoding support is completely broken.
+  % This settings is for the document root file.
+  \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
+  \else
+    \XeTeXinputencoding "bytes"
+  \fi
+  %
   % Encoding being declared for the document.
   \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
   %
@@ -8109,10 +9600,12 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   %
   \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
      \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
-     \utfeightchardefs
+     % since we already invoked \utfeightchardefs at the top level
+     % (below), do not re-invoke it, then our check for duplicated
+     % definitions triggers.  Making non-ascii chars active is enough.
   %
   \else
-    \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
+    \message{Ignoring unknown document encoding: #1.}%
   %
   \fi % utfeight
   \fi % latnine
@@ -8121,10 +9614,11 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \fi % ascii
 }
 
+% emacs-page
 % A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
 % the default font encoding (OT1).
 %
-\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}
+\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing, sorry: #1.}}
 
 % Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
 \def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
@@ -8136,19 +9630,19 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
 %
 % Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
 \def\latonechardefs{%
-  \gdef^^a0{~}
+  \gdef^^a0{\tie}
   \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
-  \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}}
-  \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
-  \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
-  \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
-  \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}}
+  \gdef^^a2{{\tcfont \char162}} % cent
+  \gdef^^a3{\pounds}
+  \gdef^^a4{{\tcfont \char164}} % currency
+  \gdef^^a5{{\tcfont \char165}} % yen
+  \gdef^^a6{{\tcfont \char166}} % broken bar
   \gdef^^a7{\S}
   \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
   \gdef^^a9{\copyright}
   \gdef^^aa{\ordf}
   \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft}
-  \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$}
+  \gdef^^ac{\ensuremath\lnot}
   \gdef^^ad{\-}
   \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol}
   \gdef^^af{\={}}
@@ -8160,13 +9654,11 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
   \gdef^^b5{$\mu$}
   \gdef^^b6{\P}
-  %
-  \gdef^^b7{$^.$}
+  \gdef^^b7{\ensuremath\cdot}
   \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
   \gdef^^b9{$^1$}
   \gdef^^ba{\ordm}
-  %
-  \gdef^^bb{\guilletright}
+  \gdef^^bb{\guillemetright}
   \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
   \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
   \gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
@@ -8258,7 +9750,7 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
 
 % Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
 \def\lattwochardefs{%
-  \gdef^^a0{~}
+  \gdef^^a0{\tie}
   \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
   \gdef^^a2{\u{}}
   \gdef^^a3{\L}
@@ -8339,8 +9831,8 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
   \gdef^^eb{\"e}
   \gdef^^ec{\v e}
-  \gdef^^ed{\'\i}
-  \gdef^^ee{\^\i}
+  \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}}
+  \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}}
   \gdef^^ef{\v d}
   %
   \gdef^^f0{\dh}
@@ -8420,6 +9912,18 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \UTFviiiLoop
 \endgroup
 
+\def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below
+
+% @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it.
+\def\U#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple	
+    \errmessage{Unicode character U+#1 not supported, sorry}%
+  \else
+    \csname uni:#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+}
+
 \begingroup
   \catcode`\"=12
   \catcode`\<=12
@@ -8428,10 +9932,9 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \catcode`\;=12
   \catcode`\!=12
   \catcode`\~=13
-
   \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
     \countUTFz = "#1\relax
-    \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
+    %\wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
     \begingroup
       \parseXMLCharref
       \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
@@ -8443,6 +9946,13 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
       \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
        \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
        \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
+      % 
+      \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax \else
+       \message{Internal error, already defined: #1}%
+      \fi
+      %
+      % define an additional control sequence for this code point.
+      \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp
     \endgroup}
 
   \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
@@ -8480,25 +9990,55 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
     \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
 \endgroup
 
+% https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plane_(Unicode)#Basic_M
+% U+0000..U+007F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_Latin_(Unicode_block)
+% U+0080..U+00FF = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin-1_Supplement_(Unicode_block)
+% U+0100..U+017F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-A
+% U+0180..U+024F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-B
+% 
+% Many of our renditions are less than wonderful, and all the missing
+% characters are available somewhere.  Loading the necessary fonts
+% awaits user request.  We can't truly support Unicode without
+% reimplementing everything that's been done in LaTeX for many years,
+% plus probably using luatex or xetex, and who knows what else.
+% We won't be doing that here in this simple file.  But we can try to at
+% least make most of the characters not bomb out.
+%
 \def\utfeightchardefs{%
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2}{{\tcfont \char162}}% 0242=cent
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4}{{\tcfont \char164}}% 0244=currency
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5}{{\tcfont \char165}}% 0245=yen
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6}{{\tcfont \char166}}% 0246=brokenbar
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\S}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC}{\ensuremath\lnot}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\ensuremath\pm}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2}{$^2$}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3}{$^3$}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{$\mu$}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\P}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\ensuremath\cdot}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{$^1$}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC}{$1\over4$}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD}{$1\over2$}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE}{$3\over4$}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
@@ -8515,7 +10055,7 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
@@ -8523,6 +10063,7 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7}{\ensuremath\times}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
@@ -8531,7 +10072,7 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
@@ -8548,7 +10089,7 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
@@ -8556,6 +10097,7 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7}{\ensuremath\div}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
@@ -8564,7 +10106,7 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
@@ -8575,64 +10117,89 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}
-
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F}{d'}
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DH}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dh}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0122}{\cedilla{G}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0123}{\cedilla{g}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0126}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0127}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}
-
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012E}{\ogonek{I}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012F}{\ogonek{i}}
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0136}{\cedilla{K}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0137}{\cedilla{k}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0138}{\ensuremath\kappa}  
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}
-
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013B}{\cedilla{L}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013C}{\cedilla{l}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{L'}% should kern
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E}{l'}% should kern
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013F}{L\U{00B7}}
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0140}{l\U{00B7}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0145}{\cedilla{N}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0146}{\cedilla{n}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0149}{'n}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A}{\missingcharmsg{ENG}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B}{\missingcharmsg{eng}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0156}{\cedilla{R}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0157}{\cedilla{r}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
@@ -8641,13 +10208,15 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{T}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{t}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}
-
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v{t}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0166}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0167}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
@@ -8656,9 +10225,11 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0172}{\ogonek{U}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0173}{\ogonek{u}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
@@ -8670,7 +10241,8 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}
-
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017F}{\missingcharmsg{LONG S}}
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
@@ -8683,20 +10255,20 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
@@ -8709,23 +10281,100 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}
-
+  %
+  % Greek letters upper case
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0391}{{\it A}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0392}{{\it B}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0393}{\ensuremath{\mit\Gamma}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0394}{\ensuremath{\mit\Delta}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0395}{{\it E}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0396}{{\it Z}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0397}{{\it H}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0398}{\ensuremath{\mit\Theta}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0399}{{\it I}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039A}{{\it K}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039B}{\ensuremath{\mit\Lambda}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039C}{{\it M}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039D}{{\it N}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039E}{\ensuremath{\mit\Xi}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039F}{{\it O}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A0}{\ensuremath{\mit\Pi}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A1}{{\it P}}
+  %\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A2}{} % none - corresponds to final sigma
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A3}{\ensuremath{\mit\Sigma}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A4}{{\it T}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A5}{\ensuremath{\mit\Upsilon}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A6}{\ensuremath{\mit\Phi}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A7}{{\it X}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A8}{\ensuremath{\mit\Psi}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A9}{\ensuremath{\mit\Omega}}
+  %
+  % Vowels with accents
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0390}{\ensuremath{\ddot{\acute\iota}}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AC}{\ensuremath{\acute\alpha}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AD}{\ensuremath{\acute\epsilon}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AE}{\ensuremath{\acute\eta}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AF}{\ensuremath{\acute\iota}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B0}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ddot\upsilon}}}
+  %
+  % Standalone accent
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0384}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ }}}
+  %
+  % Greek letters lower case
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B1}{\ensuremath\alpha}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B2}{\ensuremath\beta}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B3}{\ensuremath\gamma}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B4}{\ensuremath\delta}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B5}{\ensuremath\epsilon}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B6}{\ensuremath\zeta}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B7}{\ensuremath\eta}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B8}{\ensuremath\theta}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B9}{\ensuremath\iota}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BA}{\ensuremath\kappa}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BB}{\ensuremath\lambda}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BC}{\ensuremath\mu}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BD}{\ensuremath\nu}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BE}{\ensuremath\xi}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BF}{{\it o}} % omicron
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C0}{\ensuremath\pi}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C1}{\ensuremath\rho}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C2}{\ensuremath\varsigma}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C3}{\ensuremath\sigma}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C4}{\ensuremath\tau}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C5}{\ensuremath\upsilon}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C6}{\ensuremath\phi}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C7}{\ensuremath\chi}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C8}{\ensuremath\psi}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C9}{\ensuremath\omega}
+  %
+  % More Greek vowels with accents
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CA}{\ensuremath{\ddot\iota}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CB}{\ensuremath{\ddot\upsilon}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CC}{\ensuremath{\acute o}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CD}{\ensuremath{\acute\upsilon}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CE}{\ensuremath{\acute\omega}}
+  %
+  % Variant Greek letters
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D1}{\ensuremath\vartheta}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D6}{\ensuremath\varpi}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03F1}{\ensuremath\varrho}
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
@@ -8738,10 +10387,10 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
@@ -8750,7 +10399,7 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
@@ -8763,7 +10412,7 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
@@ -8774,7 +10423,7 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
@@ -8785,7 +10434,7 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
@@ -8796,12 +10445,12 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
@@ -8818,7 +10467,7 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
@@ -8829,30 +10478,31 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}
-
+  %
+  % Punctuation
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}
@@ -8861,26 +10511,227 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\ensuremath\dagger}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\ensuremath\ddagger}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{202F}{\thinspace}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}
-
+  %
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}
-
+  %
+  % Mathematical symbols
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2200}{\ensuremath\forall}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2203}{\ensuremath\exists}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2208}{\ensuremath\in}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\ast}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221E}{\ensuremath\infty}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2225}{\ensuremath\parallel}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2227}{\ensuremath\wedge}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2229}{\ensuremath\cap}
   \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2264}{\ensuremath\leq}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2265}{\ensuremath\geq}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2282}{\ensuremath\subset}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2287}{\ensuremath\supseteq}
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\ensuremath\Vert}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2032}{\ensuremath\prime}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{210F}{\ensuremath\hbar}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2111}{\ensuremath\Im}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2113}{\ensuremath\ell}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2118}{\ensuremath\wp}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211C}{\ensuremath\Re}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2127}{\ensuremath\mho}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2135}{\ensuremath\aleph}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\ensuremath\leftarrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\ensuremath\uparrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\ensuremath\downarrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2194}{\ensuremath\leftrightarrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2195}{\ensuremath\updownarrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2196}{\ensuremath\nwarrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2197}{\ensuremath\nearrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2198}{\ensuremath\searrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2199}{\ensuremath\swarrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A6}{\ensuremath\mapsto}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A9}{\ensuremath\hookleftarrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21AA}{\ensuremath\hookrightarrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BC}{\ensuremath\leftharpoonup}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BD}{\ensuremath\leftharpoondown}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BE}{\ensuremath\upharpoonright}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C0}{\ensuremath\rightharpoonup}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C1}{\ensuremath\rightharpoondown}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21CC}{\ensuremath\rightleftharpoons}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D0}{\ensuremath\Leftarrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D1}{\ensuremath\Uparrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D3}{\ensuremath\Downarrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D4}{\ensuremath\Leftrightarrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D5}{\ensuremath\Updownarrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21DD}{\ensuremath\leadsto}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2201}{\ensuremath\complement}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2202}{\ensuremath\partial}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2205}{\ensuremath\emptyset}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2207}{\ensuremath\nabla}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2209}{\ensuremath\notin}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220B}{\ensuremath\owns}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220F}{\ensuremath\prod}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2210}{\ensuremath\coprod}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2211}{\ensuremath\sum}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2213}{\ensuremath\mp}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2218}{\ensuremath\circ}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221A}{\ensuremath\surd}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221D}{\ensuremath\propto}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2220}{\ensuremath\angle}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2223}{\ensuremath\mid}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2228}{\ensuremath\vee}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222A}{\ensuremath\cup}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222B}{\ensuremath\smallint}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222E}{\ensuremath\oint}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{223C}{\ensuremath\sim}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2240}{\ensuremath\wr}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2243}{\ensuremath\simeq}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2245}{\ensuremath\cong}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2248}{\ensuremath\approx}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{224D}{\ensuremath\asymp}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2250}{\ensuremath\doteq}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2260}{\ensuremath\neq}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226A}{\ensuremath\ll}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226B}{\ensuremath\gg}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227A}{\ensuremath\prec}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227B}{\ensuremath\succ}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2283}{\ensuremath\supset}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2286}{\ensuremath\subseteq}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228E}{\ensuremath\uplus}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228F}{\ensuremath\sqsubset}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2290}{\ensuremath\sqsupset}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2291}{\ensuremath\sqsubseteq}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2292}{\ensuremath\sqsupseteq}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2293}{\ensuremath\sqcap}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2294}{\ensuremath\sqcup}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2295}{\ensuremath\oplus}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2296}{\ensuremath\ominus}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2297}{\ensuremath\otimes}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2298}{\ensuremath\oslash}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2299}{\ensuremath\odot}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A2}{\ensuremath\vdash}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A3}{\ensuremath\dashv}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A4}{\ensuremath\ptextop}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A5}{\ensuremath\bot}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A8}{\ensuremath\models}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22B4}{\ensuremath\unlhd}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22B5}{\ensuremath\unrhd}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C0}{\ensuremath\bigwedge}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C1}{\ensuremath\bigvee}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C2}{\ensuremath\bigcap}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C3}{\ensuremath\bigcup}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C4}{\ensuremath\diamond}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C5}{\ensuremath\cdot}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C6}{\ensuremath\star}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C8}{\ensuremath\bowtie}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2308}{\ensuremath\lceil}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2309}{\ensuremath\rceil}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230A}{\ensuremath\lfloor}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230B}{\ensuremath\rfloor}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2322}{\ensuremath\frown}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2323}{\ensuremath\smile}
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25A1}{\ensuremath\Box}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B3}{\ensuremath\triangle}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B7}{\ensuremath\triangleright}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25BD}{\ensuremath\bigtriangledown}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C1}{\ensuremath\triangleleft}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C7}{\ensuremath\Diamond}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2660}{\ensuremath\spadesuit}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2661}{\ensuremath\heartsuit}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2662}{\ensuremath\diamondsuit}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2663}{\ensuremath\clubsuit}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266D}{\ensuremath\flat}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266E}{\ensuremath\natural}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266F}{\ensuremath\sharp}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{26AA}{\ensuremath\bigcirc}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27B9}{\ensuremath\rangle}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27C2}{\ensuremath\perp}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27E8}{\ensuremath\langle}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F5}{\ensuremath\longleftarrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F6}{\ensuremath\longrightarrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F7}{\ensuremath\longleftrightarrow}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27FC}{\ensuremath\longmapsto}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{29F5}{\ensuremath\setminus}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A00}{\ensuremath\bigodot}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A01}{\ensuremath\bigoplus}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A02}{\ensuremath\bigotimes}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A04}{\ensuremath\biguplus}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A06}{\ensuremath\bigsqcup}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A1D}{\ensuremath\Join}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A3F}{\ensuremath\amalg}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AAF}{\ensuremath\preceq}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AB0}{\ensuremath\succeq}
+  %
+  \global\mathchardef\checkmark="1370 % actually the square root sign
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2713}{\ensuremath\checkmark}
 }% end of \utfeightchardefs
 
-
 % US-ASCII character definitions.
 \def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
    \relax
 }
 
+% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
+\def\nonasciistringdefs{%
+  \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+  \def\defstringchar##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
+  %
+  \defstringchar^^80\defstringchar^^81\defstringchar^^82\defstringchar^^83%
+  \defstringchar^^84\defstringchar^^85\defstringchar^^86\defstringchar^^87%
+  \defstringchar^^88\defstringchar^^89\defstringchar^^8a\defstringchar^^8b%
+  \defstringchar^^8c\defstringchar^^8d\defstringchar^^8e\defstringchar^^8f%
+  %
+  \defstringchar^^90\defstringchar^^91\defstringchar^^92\defstringchar^^93%
+  \defstringchar^^94\defstringchar^^95\defstringchar^^96\defstringchar^^97%
+  \defstringchar^^98\defstringchar^^99\defstringchar^^9a\defstringchar^^9b%
+  \defstringchar^^9c\defstringchar^^9d\defstringchar^^9e\defstringchar^^9f%
+  %
+  \defstringchar^^a0\defstringchar^^a1\defstringchar^^a2\defstringchar^^a3%
+  \defstringchar^^a4\defstringchar^^a5\defstringchar^^a6\defstringchar^^a7%
+  \defstringchar^^a8\defstringchar^^a9\defstringchar^^aa\defstringchar^^ab%
+  \defstringchar^^ac\defstringchar^^ad\defstringchar^^ae\defstringchar^^af%
+  %
+  \defstringchar^^b0\defstringchar^^b1\defstringchar^^b2\defstringchar^^b3%
+  \defstringchar^^b4\defstringchar^^b5\defstringchar^^b6\defstringchar^^b7%
+  \defstringchar^^b8\defstringchar^^b9\defstringchar^^ba\defstringchar^^bb%
+  \defstringchar^^bc\defstringchar^^bd\defstringchar^^be\defstringchar^^bf%
+  %
+  \defstringchar^^c0\defstringchar^^c1\defstringchar^^c2\defstringchar^^c3%
+  \defstringchar^^c4\defstringchar^^c5\defstringchar^^c6\defstringchar^^c7%
+  \defstringchar^^c8\defstringchar^^c9\defstringchar^^ca\defstringchar^^cb%
+  \defstringchar^^cc\defstringchar^^cd\defstringchar^^ce\defstringchar^^cf%
+  %
+  \defstringchar^^d0\defstringchar^^d1\defstringchar^^d2\defstringchar^^d3%
+  \defstringchar^^d4\defstringchar^^d5\defstringchar^^d6\defstringchar^^d7%
+  \defstringchar^^d8\defstringchar^^d9\defstringchar^^da\defstringchar^^db%
+  \defstringchar^^dc\defstringchar^^dd\defstringchar^^de\defstringchar^^df%
+  %
+  \defstringchar^^e0\defstringchar^^e1\defstringchar^^e2\defstringchar^^e3%
+  \defstringchar^^e4\defstringchar^^e5\defstringchar^^e6\defstringchar^^e7%
+  \defstringchar^^e8\defstringchar^^e9\defstringchar^^ea\defstringchar^^eb%
+  \defstringchar^^ec\defstringchar^^ed\defstringchar^^ee\defstringchar^^ef%
+  %
+  \defstringchar^^f0\defstringchar^^f1\defstringchar^^f2\defstringchar^^f3%
+  \defstringchar^^f4\defstringchar^^f5\defstringchar^^f6\defstringchar^^f7%
+  \defstringchar^^f8\defstringchar^^f9\defstringchar^^fa\defstringchar^^fb%
+  \defstringchar^^fc\defstringchar^^fd\defstringchar^^fe\defstringchar^^ff%
+}
+
+
+% define all the unicode characters we know about, for the sake of @U.
+\utfeightchardefs
+
+
 % Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
 % existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
 % document encoding.
@@ -8899,8 +10750,8 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
 % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
 \vbadness = 10000
 
-% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
-\hbadness = 2000
+% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
+\hbadness = 6666
 
 % Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
 \widowpenalty=10000
@@ -9107,28 +10958,21 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
 
 \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
 
+\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment
+
 % DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
 \catcode`\^^? = 14
 
 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
-\catcode`\"=\other
-\catcode`\~=\other
-\catcode`\^=\other
-\catcode`\_=\other
-\catcode`\|=\other
-\catcode`\<=\other
-\catcode`\>=\other
-\catcode`\+=\other
-\catcode`\$=\other
-\def\normaldoublequote{"}
-\def\normaltilde{~}
-\def\normalcaret{^}
-\def\normalunderscore{_}
-\def\normalverticalbar{|}
-\def\normalless{<}
-\def\normalgreater{>}
-\def\normalplus{+}
-\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
+\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"}
+\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
+\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+}
+\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<}
+\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>}
+\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^}
+\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_}
+\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|}
+\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~}
 
 % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
 % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
@@ -9147,45 +10991,48 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
 % this is not a problem.
 \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
 
-% Turn off all special characters except @
-% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
+% Set catcodes for Texinfo file
+
+% Active characters for printing the wanted glyph.
 % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
 % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
-
+%
 \catcode`\"=\active
 \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
 \let"=\activedoublequote
-\catcode`\~=\active
-\def~{{\tt\char126}}
-\chardef\hat=`\^
-\catcode`\^=\active
-\def^{{\tt \hat}}
+\catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde
+\chardef\hatchar=`\^
+\catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hatchar}} \let^ = \activehat
 
 \catcode`\_=\active
 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
-\let\realunder=_
-% Subroutine for the previous macro.
 \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
+\let\realunder=_
 
-\catcode`\|=\active
-\def|{{\tt\char124}}
+\catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}}
+
 \chardef \less=`\<
-\catcode`\<=\active
-\def<{{\tt \less}}
+\catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless
 \chardef \gtr=`\>
-\catcode`\>=\active
-\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
-\catcode`\+=\active
-\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
-\catcode`\$=\active
-\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
+\catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr
+\catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
+\catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
+\catcode`\-=\active \let-=\normaldash
 
-% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
-% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
-% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
-% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
-\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
 
+% used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page
+% breaks in the middle of an @tex block.
+\def\texinfochars{%
+  \let< = \activeless
+  \let> = \activegtr
+  \let~ = \activetilde 
+  \let^ = \activehat
+  \markupsetuplqdefault \markupsetuprqdefault 
+  \let\b = \strong
+  \let\i = \smartitalic
+  % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too.
+}
+
 % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
 % parsing them.
 \def\turnoffactive{%
@@ -9204,69 +11051,128 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
 % \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
 {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
 
-% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
+% In Texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
 % in fixed width font.
-\catcode`\\=\active
-@def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}}
-% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
-%  @let \ = @normalbackslash
+\catcode`\\=\active  % @ for escape char from now on.
 
+% Print a typewriter backslash.  For math mode, we can't simply use
+% \backslashcurfont: the story here is that in math mode, the \char
+% of \backslashcurfont ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol
+% font (because \char in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex
+% sets \mathcode`\\="026E).  Hence we use an explicit \mathchar,
+% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam;
+% ignored family value; char position "5C).  We can't use " for the
+% usual hex value because it has already been made active.
+
+@def@ttbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}}
+@let@backslashchar = @ttbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents.
+
 % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
 % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
-% catcode other.
+% catcode other.  We switch back and forth between these.
 @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
 @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
 
 % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
 % the literal character `\'.
 %
-@def@normalturnoffactive{%
-  @let\=@normalbackslash
-  @let"=@normaldoublequote
-  @let~=@normaltilde
-  @let^=@normalcaret
-  @let_=@normalunderscore
-  @let|=@normalverticalbar
-  @let<=@normalless
-  @let>=@normalgreater
-  @let+=@normalplus
-  @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
-  @markupsetuplqdefault
-  @markupsetuprqdefault
-  @unsepspaces
+{@catcode`- = @active
+ @gdef@normalturnoffactive{%
+   @nonasciistringdefs
+   @let-=@normaldash
+   @let"=@normaldoublequote
+   @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
+   @let+=@normalplus
+   @let<=@normalless
+   @let>=@normalgreater
+   @let^=@normalcaret
+   @let_=@normalunderscore
+   @let|=@normalverticalbar
+   @let~=@normaltilde
+   @let\=@ttbackslash
+   @markupsetuplqdefault
+   @markupsetuprqdefault
+   @unsepspaces
+ }
 }
 
-% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
-% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
-@otherifyactive
+% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
+% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
+% So turn them off again, and have @fixbackslash turn them back on.
+@catcode`+=@other @catcode`@_=@other
 
+% \enablebackslashhack - allow file to begin `\input texinfo'
+%
 % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
 % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
 % a backslash.
-%
-@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
-@global@let\ = @eatinput
+% If the file did not have a `\input texinfo', then it is turned off after
+% the first line; otherwise the first `\' in the file would cause an error.
+% This is used on the very last line of this file, texinfo.tex.
+% We also use @c to call @fixbackslash, in case ends of lines are hidden.
+{
+@catcode`@^=7
+@catcode`@^^M=13@gdef@enablebackslashhack{%
+  @global@let\ = @eatinput%
+  @catcode`@^^M=13%
+  @def@c{@fixbackslash@c}%
+  @def ^^M{@let^^M@secondlinenl}%
+  @gdef @secondlinenl{@let^^M@thirdlinenl}%
+  @gdef @thirdlinenl{@fixbackslash}%
+}}
 
-% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
-% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
-% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
-% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
-% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
-%
+{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode`@^^M=13%
+@gdef@eatinput input texinfo#1^^M{@fixbackslash}}
+
+% Emergency active definition of newline, in case an active newline token
+% appears by mistake.
+{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode13=13%
+@gdef@enableemergencynewline{%
+  @gdef^^M{%
+    @par%
+    %<warning: active newline>@par%
+}}}
+
+
 @gdef@fixbackslash{%
-  @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
+  @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @ttbackslash @fi
+  @catcode13=5 % regular end of line
+  @enableemergencynewline
+  @let@c=@texinfoc
+  % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
+  % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
   @catcode`+=@active
   @catcode`@_=@active
+  %
+  % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
+  % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.  This macro, @fixbackslash, gets
+  % called at the beginning of every Texinfo file.  Not opening texinfo.cnf
+  % directly in this file, texinfo.tex, makes it possible to make a format
+  % file for Texinfo.
+  %
+  @openin 1 texinfo.cnf
+  @ifeof 1 @else @input texinfo.cnf @fi
+  @closein 1
 }
 
+
 % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
 @escapechar = `@@
 
+% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need
+% active definitions as the normal characters.
+@def@normaldot{.}
+@def@normalquest{?}
+@def@normalslash{/}
+
 % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
-@catcode`@& = @other
-@catcode`@# = @other
-@catcode`@% = @other
+% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line.
+@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&}
+@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#}
+@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%}
 
+@let @hashchar = @normalhash
+
 @c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
 @c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}.  If we
 @c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
@@ -9278,7 +11184,7 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
 
 @c Local variables:
 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
-@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
+@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message\\|emacs-page"
 @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
 @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
 @c time-stamp-end: "}"
@@ -9289,3 +11195,4 @@ directory should work if nowhere else does.}
 @ignore
    arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
 @end ignore
+@enablebackslashhack